BA01719D/06/EN/04.19
714514502019-09-16

Products

Solutions

Services

Valid as of version
01.01.zz (Device firmware)

Operating Instructions
Proline Promag P 300
PROFINETElectromagnetic flowmeter

Keep cover

Sp a
nnu

ng

öff
ne

n

hile
tw
gh

ti

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET• Make sure the document is stored in a safe place such that it is always available whenworking on or with the device.
• To avoid danger to individuals or the facility, read the "Basic safety instructions" section
carefully, as well as all other safety instructions in the document that are specific toworking procedures.
• The manufacturer reserves the right to modify technical data without prior notice. Your
Endress+Hauser Sales Center will supply you with current information and updates tothese instructions.

2

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Table of contents

Table of contents
1

About this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

6Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

1.1
1.2

6.1

6.3

Installation conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
6.1.1 Mounting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
6.1.2 Environment and process
requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
6.1.3 Special mounting instructions . . . . . . 26
Mounting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . 26
6.2.1 Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
6.2.2 Preparing the measuring device . . . . . 26
6.2.3 Mounting the sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
6.2.4 Turning the transmitter housing . . . . 30
6.2.5 Turning the display module . . . . . . . . 31
Post-installation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

1.4

Document function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.2.1 Safety symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.2.2 Electrical symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.2.3 Communication symbols . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.2.4 Tool symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.2.5 Symbols forcertain types of information . . . . . . . . . 7
1.2.6 Symbols in graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.3.1 Standard documentation . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.3.2 Supplementary device-dependent
documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Registered trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

7Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

2

Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

7.1

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7

Requirements for the personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Designated use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Workplace safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Operational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Product safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
IT security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Device-specific IT security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.7.1 Protecting access via hardware write
protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.7.2 Protecting access via a password . . . . 11
2.7.3 Access via Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.7.4 Access via service interface (CDIRJ45) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

1.3

6.2

3

Product description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

3.1

Product design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

4

Incoming acceptance and productidentification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

7.5

4.1
4.2

Incoming acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Product identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.2.1 Transmitter nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . 16
4.2.2 Sensor nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
4.2.3 Symbols on measuring device . . . . . . 18

7.6
7.7

Connection conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
7.1.1 Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
7.1.2 Requirements for connecting cable . . . 33
7.1.3 Terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
7.1.4 Device plugs available . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
7.1.5 Pin assignment of device plug . . . . . . 36
7.1.6 Preparing the measuring device . . . . . 36
Connecting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . 37
7.2.1 Connecting the transmitter . . . . . . . . 37
7.2.2 Integrating the transmitter into a
network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
7.2.3 Connecting the remote display andoperating module DKX001 . . . . . . . . 43
Ensuring potential equalization . . . . . . . . . . . 43
7.3.1 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
7.3.2 Connection example, standard
scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
7.3.3 Connection example in special
situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Special connection instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
7.4.1 Connection examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
7.5.1 Setting the device name . . . . . . . . . . . 49
7.5.2 Activating the default IP address . . . . 50
Ensuring the degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . 51
Post-connection check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

8Operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

5

Storage and transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

5.1
5.2

Storage conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Transporting the product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
5.2.1 Measuring devices without lifting
lugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
5.2.2 Measuring devices with lifting lugs . . 20
5.2.3 Transporting with a fork lift . . . . . . . . 20
Packaging disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

8.1
8.2

Overview of operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Structure and function of the operating
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
8.2.1 Structure of the operating menu . . . . 53
8.2.2 Operating philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Access to the operating menu via the local
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
8.3.1 Operational display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
8.3.2 Navigation view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
8.3.3 Editing view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
8.3.4 Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

5.3

Endress+Hauser

7.2

7.3

7.4

8.3

3

Table of contents

8.3.5
8.3.6
8.3.7
8.3.8
8.3.9
8.3.10

8.4

8.5

Opening the context menu . . . . . . . . . 60
Navigating and selecting from list . . . 62
Calling the parameter directly . . . . . . 62
Calling up help text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Changing the parameters . . . . . . . . . 63
User roles and related accessauthorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
8.3.11 Disabling write protection via accesscode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
8.3.12 Enabling and disabling the keypadlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Access to the operating menu via the Webbrowser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
8.4.1 Function range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
8.4.2 Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
8.4.3 Establishing a connection . . . . . . . . . 67
8.4.4 Logging on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
8.4.5 User interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
8.4.6 Disabling the Web server . . . . . . . . . . 71
8.4.7 Logging out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Access to the operating menu via theoperating tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
8.5.1 Connecting the operating tool . . . . . . 72
8.5.2 FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
8.5.3 DeviceCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

10.5.10 Configuring the relay output . . . . . . 106
10.5.11 Configuring the local display . . . . . . 108
10.5.12 Configuring the low flow cut off . . . . 111
10.5.13 Configuring empty pipe detection . . 113
10.6 Advanced settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
10.6.1 Using the parameter to enter theaccess code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
10.6.2 Carrying out a sensor adjustment . . . 115
10.6.3 Configuring the totalizer . . . . . . . . . 115
10.6.4 Carrying out additional display
configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
10.6.5 Performing electrode cleaning . . . . . 121
10.6.6 WLAN configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
10.6.7 Configuration management . . . . . . . 124
10.6.8 Using parameters for device
administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
10.7 Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
10.8 Protecting settings from unauthorizedaccess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
10.8.1 Write protection via access code . . . 130
10.8.2 Write protection via write protection
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

11
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4

Reading the device locking status . . . . . . . . . 133
Adjusting the operating language . . . . . . . . . 133
Configuring the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Reading measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
11.4.1 "Process variables" submenu . . . . . . . 134
11.4.2 Totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
11.4.3 "Input values" submenu . . . . . . . . . . 135
11.4.4 Output values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
11.5 Adapting the measuring device to the process
conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
11.6 Performing a totalizer reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
11.6.1 Function scope of the "Control
Totalizer" parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
11.6.2 Function scope of the "Reset all
totalizers" parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
11.7 Showing data logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

9System integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

9.1

9.4

Overview of device description files . . . . . . . . . 78
9.1.1 Current version data for the device . . . 78
9.1.2 Operating tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Device master file (GSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
9.2.1 File name of the device master file(GSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Cyclic data transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
9.3.1 Overview of the modules . . . . . . . . . . 80
9.3.2 Description of the modules . . . . . . . . 80
9.3.3 Status coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
9.3.4 Factory setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
9.3.5 Startup configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
System redundancy S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

10

Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

12

10.1 Function check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
10.2 Switching on the measuring device . . . . . . . . . 89
10.3 Connecting via FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
10.4 Setting the operating language . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
10.5 Configuring the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . 90
10.5.1 Defining the tag name . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
10.5.2 Setting the system units . . . . . . . . . . 91
10.5.3 Displaying the communicationinterface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
10.5.4 Selecting and setting the medium . . . 94
10.5.5 Displaying the I/O configuration . . . . 94
10.5.6 Configuring the current input . . . . . . 95
10.5.7 Configuring the status input . . . . . . . 96
10.5.8 Configuring the current output . . . . . 97
10.5.9 Configuring the pulse/frequency/
switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

12.1
12.2

9.2
9.3

4

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Diagnostics and troubleshooting . . 144

General troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Diagnostic information via light emitting
diodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
12.2.1 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
12.3 Diagnostic information on local display . . . . . 148
12.3.1 Diagnostic message . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
12.3.2 Calling up remedial measures . . . . . 150
12.4 Diagnostic information in the Web browser . 150
12.4.1 Diagnostic options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
12.4.2 Calling up remedy information . . . . 151
12.5 Diagnostic information in FieldCare or
DeviceCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
12.5.1 Diagnostic options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
12.5.2 Calling up remedy information . . . . 152
12.6 Adapting the diagnostic information . . . . . . 153
12.6.1 Adapting the diagnostic behavior . . . 153
Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

12.7

Overview of diagnostic information . . . . . . . 156
12.7.1 Diagnostic of sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
12.7.2 Diagnostic of electronic . . . . . . . . . . 159
12.7.3 Diagnostic of configuration . . . . . . . 168
12.7.4 Diagnostic of process . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
12.8 Pending diagnostic events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
12.9 Diagnostic list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
12.10 Event logbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
12.10.1 Reading out the event logbook . . . . . 181
12.10.2 Filtering the event logbook . . . . . . . 182
12.10.3 Overview of information events . . . . 182
12.11 Resetting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . 183
12.11.1 Function scope of the "Device reset"
parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
12.12 Device information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
12.13 Firmware history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

13

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

13.1

13.2
13.3

Maintenance tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
13.1.1 Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
13.1.2 Interior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
13.1.3 Replacing seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Measuring and test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Endress+Hauser services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

14

Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

14.1

General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
14.1.1 Repair and conversion concept . . . . . 187
14.1.2 Notes for repair and conversion . . . . 187
Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Endress+Hauser services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
14.5.1 Removing the measuring device . . . . 187
14.5.2 Disposing of the measuring device . . 188

14.2
14.3
14.4
14.5

15

Table of contents

16.12 Certificates and approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
16.13 Application packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
16.14 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
16.15 Supplementary documentation . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

15.1

Device-specific accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
15.1.1 For the transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
15.1.2 For the sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
15.2 Communication-specific accessories . . . . . . . 190
15.3 Service-specific accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
15.4 System components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

16

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

16.1 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
16.2 Function and system design . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
16.3 Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
16.4 Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
16.5 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
16.6 Performance characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
16.7 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
16.8 Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
16.9 Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
16.10 Mechanical construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
16.11 Human interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Endress+Hauser

5About this document

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

1

About this document

1.1

Document function

These Operating Instructions contain all the information that is required in various phasesof the life cycle of the device: from product identification, incoming acceptance andstorage, to mounting, connection, operation and commissioning through totroubleshooting, maintenance and disposal.

1.2

Symbols

1.2.1

Safety symbols

DANGER

This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation will result inserious or fatal injury.
WARNING

This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation can result inserious or fatal injury.
CAUTION

This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation can result inminor or medium injury.
NOTICE

This symbol contains information on procedures and other facts which do not result inpersonal injury.

1.2.2

Electrical symbols
SymbolMeaning
Direct current
Alternating current
Direct current and alternating current
Ground connection
A grounded terminal which, as far as the operator is concerned, is grounded via agrounding system.
Protective Earth (PE)A terminal which must be connected to ground prior to establishing any otherconnections.
The ground terminals are situated inside and outside the device:• Inner ground terminal: Connects the protectiv earth to the mains supply.
• Outer ground terminal: Connects the device to the plant grounding system.

1.2.3

Communication symbols
SymbolMeaning
Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN)
Communication via a wireless, local network.
LED
Light emitting diode is off.

6

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

About this document

SymbolMeaning
LED
Light emitting diode is on.
LED
Light emitting diode is flashing.

1.2.4

Tool symbols
SymbolMeaning
Flat blade screwdriver
Allen key
Open-ended wrench

1.2.5

Symbols for certain types of information
SymbolMeaning
Permitted
Procedures, processes or actions that are permitted.
Preferred
Procedures, processes or actions that are preferred.
Forbidden
Procedures, processes or actions that are forbidden.
Tip
Indicates additional information.
Reference to documentation.
Reference to page.

A

Reference to graphic.
Notice or individual step to be observed.
1. , 2. , 3. …

Series of steps.
Result of a step.
Help in the event of a problem.
Visual inspection.

1.2.6

Symbols in graphics
SymbolMeaning

1, 2, 3, ...

Item numbers

1. , 2. , 3. , …

Series of steps

A, B, C, ...

Views

A-A, B-B, C-C, ...

Sections

Endress+Hauser

Hazardous area

7

About this document

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Symbol.

Meaning
Safe area (non-hazardous area)
Flow direction

1.3

Documentation
For an overview of the scope of the associated Technical Documentation, refer to thefollowing:• W@M Device Viewer (www.endress.com/deviceviewer): Enter the serial number
from nameplate• Endress+Hauser Operations App: Enter the serial number from the nameplate orscan the 2D matrix code (QR code) on the nameplate
Detailed list of the individual documents along with the documentation code→  217

1.3.1

Standard documentation

Document type

Purpose and content of the document

Technical Information

Planning aid for your device
The document contains all the technical data on the device and provides
an overview of the accessories and other products that can be ordered forthe device.

Sensor Brief Operating Instructions

Guides you quickly to the 1st measured value - Part 1
The Sensor Brief Operating Instructions are aimed at specialists withresponsibility for installing the measuring device.
• Incoming acceptance and product identification• Storage and transport• Installation

Transmitter Brief Operating
Instructions

Guides you quickly to the 1st measured value - Part 2
The Transmitter Brief Operating Instructions are aimed at specialists withresponsibility for commissioning, configuring and parameterizing themeasuring device (until the first measured value).
• Product description• Installation• Electrical connection• Operation options• System integration• Commissioning• Diagnostic information

Description of Device Parameters

1.3.2

Reference for your parameters
The document provides a detailed explanation of each individual
parameter in the Expert operating menu. The description is aimed atthose who work with the device over the entire life cycle and perform
specific configurations.

Supplementary device-dependent documentation

Additional documents are supplied depending on the device version ordered: Always
comply strictly with the instructions in the supplementary documentation. The
supplementary documentation is an integral part of the device documentation.

1.4

Registered trademarks

PROFINET®
Registered trademark of the PROFIBUS User Organization, Karlsruhe, Germany
8

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Safety instructions

2

Safety instructions

2.1

Requirements for the personnel

The personnel for installation, commissioning, diagnostics and maintenance must fulfill
the following requirements:‣ Trained, qualified specialists must have a relevant qualification for this specific function
and task.
‣ Are authorized by the plant owner/operator.
‣ Are familiar with federal/national regulations.
‣ Before starting work, read and understand the instructions in the manual andsupplementary documentation as well as the certificates (depending on theapplication).
‣ Follow instructions and comply with basic conditions.
The operating personnel must fulfill the following requirements:‣ Are instructed and authorized according to the requirements of the task by the facility'sowner-operator.

‣ Follow the instructions in this manual.

2.2

Designated use

Application and media
The measuring device described in these Brief Operating Instructions is intended only forflow measurement of liquids with a minimum conductivity of 5 µS/cm.
Depending on the version ordered, the measuring device can also measure potentiallyexplosive, flammable, poisonous and oxidizing media.
Measuring devices for use in hazardous areas, in hygienic applications or where there is anincreased risk due to process pressure, are labeled accordingly on the nameplate.
To ensure that the measuring device remains in proper condition for the operation time:‣ Keep within the specified pressure and temperature range.
‣ Only use the measuring device in full compliance with the data on the nameplate andthe general conditions listed in the Operating Instructions and supplementary
documentation.
‣ Based on the nameplate, check whether the ordered device is permitted for theintended use in the hazardous area (e.g. explosion protection, pressure vessel safety).
‣ Use the measuring device only for media to which the process-wetted materials are
sufficiently resistant.
‣ If the ambient temperature of the measuring device is outside the atmospherictemperature, it is absolutely essential to comply with the relevant basic conditions as
specified in the device documentation. →  8‣ Protect the measuring device permanently against corrosion from environmental
influences.
Incorrect use
Non-designated use can compromise safety. The manufacturer is not liable for damage
caused by improper or non-designated use.

LWARNING
Danger of breakage due to corrosive or abrasive fluids and ambient conditions!
‣ Verify the compatibility of the process fluid with the sensor material.
‣ Ensure the resistance of all fluid-wetted materials in the process.
‣ Keep within the specified pressure and temperature range.

Endress+Hauser

9Safety instructions

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINETNOTICE
Verification for borderline cases:‣ For special fluids and fluids for cleaning, Endress+Hauser is glad to provide assistancein verifying the corrosion resistance of fluid-wetted materials, but does not accept any
warranty or liability as minute changes in the temperature, concentration or level ofcontamination in the process can alter the corrosion resistance properties.
Residual risks

LWARNING
The electronics and the medium may cause the surfaces to heat up. This presents aburn hazard!
‣ For elevated fluid temperatures, ensure protection against contact to prevent burns.

2.3

Workplace safety

For work on and with the device:‣ Wear the required personal protective equipment according to federal/national
regulations.
For welding work on the piping:‣ Do not ground the welding unit via the measuring device.
If working on and with the device with wet hands:‣ Due to the increased risk of electric shock, gloves must be worn.

2.4

Operational safety

Risk of injury.

‣ Operate the device in proper technical condition and fail-safe condition only.
‣ The operator is responsible for interference-free operation of the device.
Conversions to the device
Unauthorized modifications to the device are not permitted and can lead to unforeseeable
dangers.
‣ If, despite this, modifications are required, consult with Endress+Hauser.
RepairTo ensure continued operational safety and reliability,‣ Carry out repairs on the device only if they are expressly permitted.
‣ Observe federal/national regulations pertaining to repair of an electrical device.
‣ Use original spare parts and accessories from Endress+Hauser only.

2.5

Product safety

This measuring device is designed in accordance with good engineering practice to meetstate-of-the-art safety requirements, has been tested, and left the factory in a condition inwhich it is safe to operate.
It meets general safety standards and legal requirements. It also complies with the EU
directives listed in the device-specific EU Declaration of Conformity. Endress+Hauser
confirms this by affixing the CE mark to the device.

10

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

2.6

Safety instructions

IT security

Our warranty is valid only if the device is installed and used as described in the Operating
Instructions. The device is equipped with security mechanisms to protect it against any
inadvertent changes to the settings.
IT security measures, which provide additional protection for the device and associateddata transfer, must be implemented by the operators themselves in line with their security
standards.

2.7

Device-specific IT security

The device offers a range of specific functions to support protective measures on theoperator's side. These functions can be configured by the user and guarantee greater inoperation safety if used correctly. An overview of the most important functions is provided
in the following section.
Function/interface

Factory setting

Recommendation

Write protection via hardware write
protection switch →  11

Not enabled.

On an individual basis following risk
assessment.

Access code(also applies for Web server login or
FieldCare connection) →  12

Not enabled(0000).

Assign a customized access code duringcommissioning.

WLAN(order option in display module)

Enabled.

On an individual basis following risk
assessment.

WLAN security mode

Enabled (WPA2PSK)Do not change.

WLAN passphrase(password) →  12

Serial number

Assign an individual WLAN passphrase duringcommissioning.

WLAN mode

Access Point

On an individual basis following risk
assessment.

Web server→  12

Enabled.

On an individual basis following risk
assessment.

CDI-RJ45 service interface →  13–

On an individual basis following risk
assessment.

2.7.1

Protecting access via hardware write protection

Write access to the device parameters via the local display, Web browser or operating tool(e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare) can be disabled via a write protection switch (DIP switch on
the motherboard). When hardware write protection is enabled, only read access to theparameters is possible.
Hardware write protection is disabled when the device is delivered →  131.

2.7.2

Protecting access via a password

Different passwords are available to protect write access to the device parameters or accessto the device via the WLAN interface.

Endress+Hauser

11

Safety instructions

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET• User-specific access code
Protect write access to the device parameters via the local display, Web browser or
operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare). Access authorization is clearly regulated
through the use of a user-specific access code.
• WLAN passphrase
The network key protects a connection between an operating unit (e.g. notebook ortablet) and the device via the WLAN interface which can be ordered as an option.
• Infrastructure mode
When the device is operated in infrastructure mode, the WLAN passphrase corresponds
to the WLAN passphrase configured on the operator side.
User-specific access code
Write access to the device parameters via the local display, Web browser or operating tool(e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare) can be protected by the modifiable, user-specific access code(→  130).
When the device is delivered, the device does not have an access code and is equivalent to0000 (open).
WLAN passphrase: Operation as WLAN access point
A connection between an operating unit (e.g. notebook or tablet) and the device via the
WLAN interface (→  73), which can be ordered as an optional extra, is protected by
the network key. The WLAN authentication of the network key complies with theIEEE 802.11 standard.
When the device is delivered, the network key is pre-defined depending on the device. It
can be changed via the WLAN settings submenu in the WLAN passphrase parameter(→  124).
Infrastructure mode
A connection between the device and WLAN access point is protected by means of an SSID
and passphrase on the system side. Please contact the relevant system administrator foraccess.
General notes on the use of passwords• The access code and network key supplied with the device should be changed duringcommissioning.
• Follow the general rules for generating a secure password when defining and managing
the access code or network key.
• The user is responsible for the management and careful handling of the access code andnetwork key.
• For information on configuring the access code or on what to do if you lose thepassword, see the "Write protection via access code" section →  130

2.7.3

Access via Web server

The device can be operated and configured via a Web browser with the integrated Web
server (→  65). The connection is via the service interface (CDI-RJ45), the connection
for PROFINET signal transmission (RJ45 connector) or the WLAN interface.
The Web server is enabled when the device is delivered. The Web server can be disabled if
necessary (e.g. after commissioning) via the Web server functionality parameter.
The device and status information can be hidden on the login page. This prevents
unauthorized access to the information.
For detailed information on device parameters, see:
The "Description of Device Parameters" document →  218.

12

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Safety instructions

2.7.4

Access via service interface (CDI-RJ45)

The device can be connected to a network via the service interface (CDI-RJ45). Devicespecific functions guarantee the secure operation of the device in a network.
The use of relevant industrial standards and guidelines that have been defined by national
and international safety committees, such as IEC/ISA62443 or the IEEE, is recommended.
This includes organizational security measures such as the assignment of accessauthorization as well as technical measures such as network segmentation.
Transmitters with an Ex de approval may not be connected via the service interface(CDI-RJ45)!
Order code for "Approval transmitter + sensor", options (Ex de): BA, BB, C1, C2, GA,
GB, MA, MB, NA, NB
The device can be integrated in a ring topology. The device is integrated via theterminal connection for signal transmission (output 1) and the connection to theservice interface (CDI-RJ45) →  42.

Endress+Hauser

13

Product description

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

3

Product description

The device consists of a transmitter and a sensor.
The device is available as a compact version:
The transmitter and sensor form a mechanical unit.

3.1

Product design
2

1

4

3

un
ter

n
f ne
öf

Ni
Spcht Powan un
Do nu te er
en no ngr
er t op öffn
Ne gizeso pa den when
us s outens vr en
ionir

i sp

la y

e

D

Nicht

I/O

ar
ES

C

–
+
E

5
A0029586

1
1
2
3
4
5

14

Important components of a measuring device
Connection compartment cover
Display module
Transmitter housing
Electronics compartment coverSensorEndress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Incoming acceptance and product identification

4

Incoming acceptance and productidentification

4.1

Incoming acceptance
Are the order codes on thedelivery note (1) and the
product sticker (2) identical?

1
2

1
2

Are the goods undamaged?

Do the nameplate data
match the ordering
information on the delivery
note?

Order code:
Ser. no.:Ext. ord. cd.:

i

i

Date:

Is the document folder
present with accompanying
documents?
Is the optional CD-ROM with
the TechnicalDocumentation present?

• If one of the conditions is not satisfied, contact your Endress+Hauser Sales Center.
• Depending on the device version, the CD-ROM might not be part of the delivery!
The Technical Documentation is available via the Internet or via the Endress+Hauser
Operations App, see the "Product identification" section →  16.

4.2

Product identification

The following options are available for identification of the device:• Nameplate specifications• Order code with breakdown of the device features on the delivery note
• Enter serial numbers from nameplates in the W@M Device Viewer(www.endress.com/deviceviewer): All information about the device is displayed.
• Enter the serial number from nameplates in the Endress+Hauser Operations App or scan
the 2-D matrix code (QR code) on the nameplate using the Endress+Hauser Operations
App: All information about the device is displayed.

Endress+Hauser

15

Incoming acceptance and product identification

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

For an overview of the scope of the associated Technical Documentation, refer to thefollowing:• The "Additional standard documentation on the device"→  8 and "Supplementarydevice-dependent documentation"→  8 sections• The W@M Device Viewer: enter the serial number from the nameplate(www.endress.com/deviceviewer)• The Endress+Hauser Operations App: Enter the serial number from the nameplate orscan the 2-D matrix code (QR code) on the nameplate.

4.2.1

Transmitter nameplate
1 2

3 4 5

Order code:
Ser. no.:Ext. ord. cd.:

20

6

19
7
18
17
16
15
14

8
i

i

Date:

13

12

11

9

10
A0029192

2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

16

Example of a transmitter nameplate
Manufacturing location
Name of the transmitter
Order code
Serial number (ser. no.)Extended order code (Ext. ord. cd.)
Degree of protection
Space for approvals: use in hazardous areas
Electrical connection data: available inputs and outputs
2-D matrix code
Manufacturing date: year-month
Document number of safety-related supplementary documentation
Space for approvals and certificates: e.g. CE mark, C-Tick
Space for degree of protection of connection and electronics compartment when used in hazardous areas
Firmware version (FW) and device revision (Dev.Rev.) from the factory
Space for additional information in the case of special products
Permitted temperature range for cable
Permitted ambient temperature (Ta)Information on cable gland
Available inputs and outputs, supply voltage
Electrical connection data: supply voltage

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Incoming acceptance and product identification

4.2.2

Sensor nameplate
1

2
3
4
5

Order code:
Ser. no.:Ext. ord. cd.:

6

7
13
8

i

i

9

Date:

12

11

10
A0029205

3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

Example of sensor nameplate
Name of the sensor
Place of manufacture
Order code
Serial number (ser. no.)Extended order code (Ext. ord. cd.)
Flow; nominal diameter of the sensor; pressure rating; nominal pressure; system pressure; fluid temperature
range; material of liner and electrodes
Approval information for explosion protection, Pressure Equipment Directive and degree of protection
Document number of safety-related supplementary documentation
2-D matrix code
Manufacturing date: year-month
Flow direction
CE mark, C-Tick
Permitted ambient temperature (Ta)

Order code
The measuring device is reordered using the order code.
Extended order code
• The device type (product root) and basic specifications (mandatory features) arealways listed.
• Of the optional specifications (optional features), only the safety and approvalrelated specifications are listed (e.g. LA). If other optional specifications are alsoordered, these are indicated collectively using the # placeholder symbol (e.g. #LA#).
• If the ordered optional specifications do not include any safety and approval-related
specifications, they are indicated by the + placeholder symbol (e.g. XXXXXX-ABCDE+).

Endress+Hauser

17

Incoming acceptance and product identification

4.2.3
SymbolProline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Symbols on measuring device
MeaningWARNING!
This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation can result in serious
or fatal injury.
Reference to documentation
Refers to the corresponding device documentation.
Protective ground connection
A terminal which must be connected to ground prior to establishing any other connections.

18

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Storage and transport

5

Storage and transport

5.1

Storage conditions

Observe the following notes for storage:‣ Store in the original packaging to ensure protection from shock.
‣ Do not remove protective covers or protective caps installed on process connections.
They prevent mechanical damage to the sealing surfaces and contamination in themeasuring tube.
‣ Protect from direct sunlight to avoid unacceptably high surface temperatures.
‣ Select a storage location where moisture cannot collect in the measuring device as
fungus and bacteria infestation can damage the lining.
‣ Store in a dry and dust-free place.
‣ Do not store outdoors.
Storage temperature→  203

5.2

Transporting the productTransport the measuring device to the measuring point in the original packaging.

A0029252

Do not remove protective covers or caps installed on process connections. They
prevent mechanical damage to the sealing surfaces and contamination in themeasuring tube.

5.2.1

Measuring devices without lifting lugs

LWARNING
Center of gravity of the measuring device is higher than the suspension points of the
webbing slings.
Risk of injury if the measuring device slips.
‣ Secure the measuring device against slipping or turning.
‣ Observe the weight specified on the packaging (stick-on label).

A0029214

Endress+Hauser

19

Storage and transport

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

5.2.2

Measuring devices with lifting lugs

LCAUTION
Special transportation instructions for devices with lifting lugs
‣ Only use the lifting lugs fitted on the device or flanges to transport the device.
‣ The device must always be secured at two lifting lugs at least.

5.2.3

Transporting with a fork lift

If transporting in wood crates, the floor structure enables the crates to be lifted lengthwise
or at both sides using a forklift.

LCAUTION
Risk of damaging the magnetic coil
‣ If transporting by forklift, do not lift the sensor by the metal casing.
‣ This would buckle the casing and damage the internal magnetic coils.

A0029319

5.3

Packaging disposal

All packaging materials are environmentally friendly and 100 % recyclable:• Outer packaging of device
Polymer stretch wrap that complies with EU Directive 2002/95/EC (RoHS)• Packaging• Wooden crate treated in accordance with ISPM 15 standard, confirmed by IPPC logo
• Cardboard box in accordance with European packaging guideline 94/62EC,
recyclability confirmed by Resy symbol• Carrying and securing materials• Disposable plastic pallet• Plastic straps• Plastic adhesive strips• Filler material
Paper pads

20

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Installation

6

Installation

6.1

Installation conditions

6.1.1

Mounting positionhMounting location

A0029343

Preferably install the sensor in an ascending pipe, and ensure a sufficient distance to thenext pipe elbow: h ≥ 2 × DN
Installation in down pipes
Install a siphon with a vent valve downstream of the sensor in down pipes whose length h≥ 5 m (16.4 ft). This precaution is to avoid low pressure and the consequent risk ofdamage to the measuring tube. This measure also prevents the system losing prime.
1h2

A0028981

412hInstallation in a down pipe
Vent valve
Pipe siphon
Length of down pipe

Installation in partially filled pipes
A partially filled pipe with a gradient necessitates a drain-type configuration.

N

³2

xD

N

³5

xD

A0029257

Endress+Hauser

21

Installation

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

For heavy sensors DN ≥ 350 (14")

A0016276

Orientation
The direction of the arrow on the sensor nameplate helps you to install the sensor
according to the flow direction (direction of medium flow through the piping).
Orientation
A

Recommendation

Vertical orientation

A0015591

B

1)

Horizontal orientation, transmitter at
top
A0015589

C2) 3)

Horizontal orientation, transmitter atbottom4)

A0015590

D

Horizontal orientation, transmitter atside
A0015592

1)
2)
3)
4)

Applications with low process temperatures may decrease the ambient temperature. To maintain theminimum ambient temperature for the transmitter, this orientation is recommended.
Applications with high process temperatures may increase the ambient temperature. To maintain the
maximum ambient temperature for the transmitter, this orientation is recommended.
To prevent the electronics module from overheating in the case of a sharp rise in temperature (e.g. CIP or
SIP processes), install the device with the transmitter component pointing downwards.
With the empty pipe detection function switched on: empty pipe detection only works if the transmitter
housing is pointing upwards.

Horizontal• Ideally, the measuring electrode plane should be horizontal. This prevents brief
insulation of the two measuring electrodes by entrained air bubbles.
• Empty pipe detection only works if the transmitter housing is pointing upwards asotherwise there is no guarantee that the empty pipe detection function will actually
respond to a partially filled or empty measuring tube.

22

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Installation

1
2

2
3
A0029344

1
2
3

EPD electrode for empty pipe detection
Measuring electrodes for signal detection
Reference electrode for potential equalization

Measuring devices with tantalum or platinum electrodes can be ordered without an
EPD electrode. In this case, empty pipe detection is performed via the measuring
electrodes.
Inlet and outlet runs
If possible, install the sensor upstream from fittings such as valves, T-pieces or elbows.
Observe the following inlet and outlet runs to comply with accuracy specifications:≥ 5 × DN

≥ 2 × DN

A0028997

Installation dimensions
For the dimensions and installation lengths of the device, see the "Technical
Information" document, "Mechanical construction" section.

6.1.2

Environment and process requirements

Ambient temperature range
Transmitter

Standard: –40 to +60 °C (–40 to +140 °F)

Local display–20 to +60 °C (–4 to +140 °F), the readability of the display may be
impaired at temperatures outside the temperature range.

Sensor• Process connection material, carbon steel:–10 to +60 °C (+14 to +140 °F)• Process connection material, stainless steel:–40 to +60 °C (–40 to +140 °F)

Liner

Do not exceed or fall below the permitted temperature range of the liner .

If operating outdoors:• Install the measuring device in a shady location.
• Avoid direct sunlight, particularly in warm climatic regions.
• Avoid direct exposure to weather conditions.

Endress+Hauser

23

Installation

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

System pressure

A0028777

Never install the sensor on the pump suction side in order to avoid the risk of low pressure,and thus damage to the liner.
Furthermore, install pulse dampers if reciprocating, diaphragm or peristaltic pumps
are used.
• Information on the liner's resistance to partial vacuum• Information on the shock resistance of the measuring system• Information on the vibration resistance of the measuring system
Vibrations

L > 10 m (33 ft)
A0029004

5

Measures to prevent vibration of the device

In the event of very strong vibrations, the pipe and sensor must be supported and fixed.
• Information on the shock resistance of the measuring system• Information on the vibration resistance of the measuring system
Thermal insulation
If process fluids are very hot, it is necessary to insulate pipes in order to reduce energy loss
and to prevent individuals from accidentally coming into contact with hot pipes. Pleaseobserve the applicable standards and guidelines for insulating pipes.
A housing support/an extended neck is used for heat dissipation:• Devices with the order code for "Lining", option B "PFA high-temperature" always
come with a housing support.
• In the case of all other devices, a housing support can be ordered via the order codefor "Sensor option", option CG "Sensor extended neck".

LWARNING
Electronics overheating on account of thermal insulation!
‣ The housing support is used for heat dissipation and must be completely free (i.e.
uncovered). At the very maximum, the sensor insulation may extend as far as theupper edge of the two sensor half-shells.

24

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Installation

max.

A0031216

Adapters
Suitable adapters to DIN EN 545 (double-flange reducers) can be used to install the sensor
in larger-diameter pipes. The resultant increase in the rate of flow improves measuring
accuracy with very slow-moving fluids. The nomogram shown here can be used to
calculate the pressure loss caused by reducers and expanders.
The nomogram only applies to liquids with a viscosity similar to that of water.
1.

Calculate the ratio of the diameters d/D.

2.

From the nomogram read off the pressure loss as a function of flow velocity(downstream from the reduction) and the d/D ratio.
100 [mbar]
8 m/s
7 m/s
6 m/s
5 m/s
4 m/s

10

3 m/s

max. 8°

2 m/s

d

D
1 m/s

0.5

1

0.6

0.7

0.8

0.9

d/D
A0029002

Endress+Hauser

25

Installation

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

6.1.3

Special mounting instructions

Protective cover
280 (11.0)
134 (5.3)

12 (0.47)

30 (1.18)

48 (1.9)

146 (5.75)

255 (10.0)

A0029553

6.2

Mounting the measuring device

6.2.1

Required tools

For sensor
For flanges and other process connections: Corresponding mounting tools

6.2.2

Preparing the measuring device

1.

Remove all remaining transport packaging.

2.

Remove any protective covers or protective caps present from the sensor.

3.

Remove stick-on label on the electronics compartment cover.

6.2.3

Mounting the sensor

LWARNING
Danger due to improper process sealing!
‣ Ensure that the inside diameters of the gaskets are greater than or equal to that of theprocess connections and piping.
‣ Ensure that the gaskets are clean and undamaged.
‣ Install the gaskets correctly.

26

1.

Ensure that the direction of the arrow on the sensor matches the flow direction of
the medium.

2.

To ensure compliance with device specifications, install the measuring device
between the pipe flanges in a way that it is centered in the measurement section.

3.

If using ground disks, comply with the Installation Instructions provided.

4.

Observe required screw tightening torques →  27.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Installation

5.

Install the measuring device or turn the transmitter housing so that the cable entries
do not point upwards.
A0029263

Mounting the seals

LCAUTION
An electrically conductive layer could form on the inside of the measuring tube!
Risk of measuring signal short circuit.
‣ Do not use electrically conductive sealing compounds such as graphite.
Comply with the following instructions when installing seals:
1.

For DIN flanges: only use seals according to DIN EN 1514-1.

2.

For "PFA" liner: generally additional seals are not required.

3.

For "PTFE" liner: generally additional seals are not required.

Mounting the ground cable/ground disks
Comply with the information on potential equalization and detailed mounting instructions
for the use of ground cables/ground disks .
Screw tightening torques
Please note the following:• The screw tightening torques listed below apply only to lubricated threads and to pipes
not subjected to tensile stress.
• Tighten the screws uniformly and in diagonally opposite sequence.
• Overtightening the screws will deform the sealing faces or damage the seals.
Nominal screw tightening torques →  30
Maximum screw tightening torques
Maximum screw tightening torques for EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501)
NominaldiameterPressure rating

ScrewsFlange thickness

[mm]

[bar]

[mm]

[mm]

PTFE

PFA

15

PN 40

4 × M12

16

11

–

25

PN 40

4 × M12

18

26

20

32

PN 40

4 × M16

18

41

35

40

PN 40

4 × M16

18

52

47

50

PN 40

4 × M16

20

65

59

1)

PN 16

8 × M16

18

43

40

65

PN 40

8 × M16

22

43

40

80

PN 16

8 × M16

20

53

48

80

PN 40

8 × M16

24

53

48

65

Endress+Hauser

Max. screw tightening torque
[Nm]

27

Installation

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

1)

NominaldiameterPressure rating

ScrewsFlange thickness

Max. screw tightening torque
[Nm]

[mm]

[bar]

[mm]

[mm]

PTFE

PFA

100

PN 16

8 × M16

20

57

51

100

PN 40

8 × M20

24

78

70

125

PN 16

8 × M16

22

75

67

125

PN 40

8 × M24

26

111

99

150

PN 16

8 × M20

22

99

85

150

PN 40

8 × M24

28

136

120

200

PN 10

8 × M20

24

141

101

200

PN 16

12 × M20

24

94

67

200

PN 25

12 × M24

30

138

105

250

PN 10

12 × M20

26

110

–

250

PN 16

12 × M24

26

131

–

250

PN 25

12 × M27

32

200

–

300

PN 10

12 × M20

26

125

–

300

PN 16

12 × M24

28

179

–

300

PN 25

16 × M27

34

204

–

350

PN 10

16 × M20

26

188

–

350

PN 16

16 × M24

30

254

–

350

PN 25

16 × M30

38

380

–

400

PN 10

16 × M24

26

260

–

400

PN 16

16 × M27

32

330

–

400

PN 25

16 × M33

40

488

–

450

PN 10

20 × M24

28

235

–

450

PN 16

20 × M27

40

300

–

450

PN 25

20 × M33

46

385

–

500

PN 10

20 × M24

28

265

–

500

PN 16

20 × M30

34

448

–

500

PN 25

20 × M33

48

533

–

600

PN 10

20 × M27

28

345

–

600

PN 16

20 × M33

36

658

–

600

PN 25

20 × M36

58

731

–

Sizing as per EN 1092-1 (not DIN 2501)

Screw tightening torques for ASME B16.5, Class 150/300
Nominal diameter

28

Pressure rating

ScrewsMax. screw tightening torque [Nm]([lbf · ft])

[mm]

[in]

[psi]

[in]

PTFE

PFA

15

½

Class 150

4×½

6 (4)

– (–)

15

½

Class 300

4×½

6 (4)

– (–)

25

1

Class 150

4×½

11 (8)

10 (7)

25

1

Class 300

4 × 5/8

14 (10)12 (9)

40

1½

Class 150

4×½

24 (18)21 (15)Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Installation

Nominal diameter

Pressure rating

ScrewsMax. screw tightening torque [Nm]([lbf · ft])

[mm]

[in]

[psi]

[in]

PTFE

PFA

40

1½

Class 300

4×¾

34 (25)31 (23)50

2Class 150

4 × 5/8

47 (35)44 (32)50

2Class 300

8 × 5/8

23 (17)22 (16)80

3Class 150

4 × 5/8

79 (58)67 (49)80

3Class 300

8×¾

47 (35)42 (31)100

4Class 150

8 × 5/8

56 (41)50 (37)100

4Class 300

8×¾

67 (49)59 (44)150

6Class 150

8×¾

106 (78)

86 (63)150

6Class 300

12 × ¾

73 (54)67 (49)200

8Class 150

8×¾

143 (105)109 (80)250

10Class 150

12 × 7/8

135 (100)

– (–)

300

12

Class 150

12 × 7/8

178 (131)

– (–)

350

14

Class 150

12 × 1260 (192)

– (–)

400

16

Class 150

16 × 1246 (181)

– (–)

450

18

Class 150

16 × 1 1/8

371 (274)

– (–)

500

20

Class 150

20 × 1 1/8

341 (252)

– (–)

600

24

Class 150

20 × 1 ¼

477 (352)– (–)

Maximum screw tightening torques for JIS B2220
Nominal diameter

Pressure rating

Screws

[mm]

[bar]

[mm]

PTFE

PFA

25

10K

4 × M16

32

27

20K

4 × M16

32

27

10K

4 × M16

38

–

20K

4 × M16

38

–

10K

4 × M16

41

37

20K

4 × M16

41

37

10K

4 × M16

54

46

20K

8 × M16

27

23

10K

4 × M16

74

63

20K

8 × M16

37

31

10K

8 × M16

38

32

20K

8 × M20

57

46

10K

8 × M16

47

38

20K

8 × M20

75

58

10K

8 × M20

80

66

20K

8 × M22

121

103

10K

8 × M20

99

81

20K

12 × M22

108

72

10K

12 × M20

82

54

20K

12 × M22

121

88

32

40

50

65

80

100

125

150

200

Endress+Hauser

Max. screw tightening torque [Nm]29

Installation

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Nominal diameter

Pressure rating

Screws

[mm]

[bar]

[mm]

PTFE

PFA

250

10K

12 × M22

133

–

20K

12 × M24

212

–

10K

16 × M22

99

–

20K

16 × M24

183

–

300

Max. screw tightening torque [Nm]Screw tightening torques for AS 2129, Table E
Nominal diameterScrewsMax. screw tightening torque
[Nm]

[mm]

[mm]

PTFE

25

4 × M122150

4 × M16

42

Screw tightening torques for AS 4087, PN 16
Nominal diameterScrewsMax. screw tightening torque
[Nm]

[mm]

[mm]

PTFE

50

4 × M16

42

Nominal screw tightening torques
Nominal screw tightening torques for JIS B2220
Nominal diameter

Pressure rating

Screws

[mm]

[bar]

[mm]

HG

PUR

350

10K

16 × M22

109

109

20K

16 × M30×3

217

217

10K

16 × M24

163

163

20K

16 × M30×3

258

258

10K

16 × M24

155

155

20K

16 × M30×3

272

272

10K

16 × M24

183

183

20K

16 × M30×3

315

315

10K

16 × M30

235

235

20K

16 × M36×3

381

381

400

450

500

600

6.2.4

Nom. screw tightening torque [Nm]Turning the transmitter housing

To provide easier access to the connection compartment or display module, the transmitter
housing can be turned.

30

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Installation

4.

n
f ne
öf

Nicht

Nicht

un
te r

un
te r

n
f ne
öf
ES

C

ES

C

–

–

+

+

E

e

e

E

ar

ar

1.

3 mm

2.

4 mm

3.
A0029993

1.

Depending on the device version: Loosen the securing clamp of the connection
compartment cover.

2.

Unscrew the connection compartment cover.

3.

Release the fixing screw.

4.

Turn the housing to the desired position.

5.

Firmly tighten the securing screw.

6.

Screw on the connection compartment cover7.

Depending on the device version: Attach the securing clamp of the connection
compartment cover.

6.2.5

Turning the display module

The display module can be turned to optimize display readability and operability.

n
f ne
öf

Nicht

Nicht

un
te r

un
te r

n
f ne
öf
ES

C

ES

C

–

–

+

+

ES

C

E

–

E

ar

e

E

ar

2.

3 mm

1.

e

+

3.
A0030035

Endress+Hauser

1.

Depending on the device version: Loosen the securing clamp of the connection
compartment cover.

2.

Unscrew the connection compartment cover.

3.

Turn the display module to the desired position: max. 8 × 45° in each direction.

4.

Screw on the connection compartment cover.

5.

Depending on the device version: Attach the securing clamp of the connection
compartment cover.

31

Installation

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

6.3

Post-installation check

Is the device undamaged (visual inspection)?



Does the measuring device conform to the measuring point specifications?
For example:• Process temperature• Process pressure (refer to the section on "Pressure-temperature ratings" in the "Technical
Information" document)• Ambient temperature• Measuring range

Has the correct orientation for the sensor been selected ?
• According to sensor type
• According to medium temperature• According to medium properties (outgassing, with entrained solids)

32



Does the arrow on the sensor nameplate match the direction of flow of the fluid through thepiping ?



Are the measuring point identification and labeling correct (visual inspection)?

Is the device adequately protected from precipitation and direct sunlight?

Have the fixing screws been tightened with the correct tightening torque?

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINETElectrical connection

7

Electrical connection

NOTICEThe measuring device does not have an internal circuit breaker.
‣ For this reason, assign the measuring device a switch or power-circuit breaker so thatthe power supply line can be easily disconnected from the mains.
‣ Although the measuring device is equipped with a fuse, additional overcurrent
protection (maximum 10 A) should be integrated into the system installation.

7.1

Connection conditions

7.1.1

Required tools• For cable entries: Use corresponding tools• For securing clamp: Allen key 3 mm
• Wire stripper• When using stranded cables: Crimper for wire end ferrule• For removing cables from terminal: Flat blade screwdriver ≤ 3 mm (0.12 in)

7.1.2

Requirements for connecting cable

The connecting cables provided by the customer must fulfill the following requirements.
Electrical safety
In accordance with applicable federal/national regulations.
Protective ground cable
Cable ≥2.08 mm2 (14 AWG)
The grounding impedance must be less than 1 Ω.
Permitted temperature range• The installation guidelines that apply in the country of installation must be observed.
• The cables must be suitable for the minimum and maximum temperatures to be
expected.
Power supply cableStandard installation cable is sufficient.
Signal cable
PROFINET
Standard IEC 61156-6 specifies CAT 5 as the minimum category for a cable used for
PROFINET. CAT 5e and CAT 6 are recommended.
For more information on planning and installing PROFINET networks, see: "PROFINET
Cabling and Interconnection Technology", Guideline for PROFINET
Current output 0/4 to 20 mA
Standard installation cable is sufficient.
Pulse/frequency/switch output
Standard installation cable is sufficient.

Endress+Hauser

33

Electrical connection

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Relay output
Standard installation cable is sufficient.
Current input 0/4 to 20 mA
Standard installation cable is sufficient.
Status inputStandard installation cable is sufficient.
Cable diameter• Cable glands supplied:
M20 × 1.5 with cable ⌀ 6 to 12 mm (0.24 to 0.47 in)• Spring-loaded terminals: Suitable for strands and strands with ferrules.
Conductor cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 (24 to 12 AWG).
Requirements for the connecting cable – Remote display and operating module
DKX001
Optionally available connecting cable
A cable is supplied depending on the order option• Order code for measuring device: order code 030 for "Display; operation", option Oor• Order code for measuring device: order code 030 for "Display; operation", option M
and• Order code for DKX001: order code 040 for "Cable", option A, B, D, E
Standard cable2 × 2 × 0.34 mm2 (22 AWG) PVC cable with common shield (2 pairs, pairstranded)

Flame resistanceAccording to DIN EN 60332-1-2

Oil-resistanceAccording to DIN EN 60811-2-1

ShieldingTin-plated copper-braid, optical cover ≥ 85 %Capacitance: core/shield≤200 pF/m

L/R≤24 µH/Ω

Available cable length

5 m (15 ft)/10 m (35 ft)/20 m (65 ft)/30 m (100 ft)

Operating temperature

When mounted in a fixed position: –50 to +105 °C (–58 to +221 °F); when cable
can move freely: –25 to +105 °C (–13 to +221 °F)

Standard cable - customer-specific cableNo cable is supplied, and it must be provided by the customer (up to max.
300 m (1 000 ft)) for the following order option:
Order code for DKX001: Order code 040 for "Cable", option 1 "None, provided by customer,
max 300 m"
A standard cable can be used as the connecting cable.

34

Standard cable4 cores (2 pairs); pair-stranded with common shield

ShieldingTin-plated copper-braid, optical cover ≥ 85 %Capacitance: core/shield

Maximum 1 000 nF for Zone 1, Class I, Division 1

L/R

Maximum 24 µH/Ω for Zone 1, Class I, Division 1

Cable length

Maximum 300 m (1 000 ft), see the following table

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Endress+Hauser

Electrical connection

Cross-section

Max. cable length for use in
Non-hazardous area,
Ex Zone 2, Class I, Division 2
Ex Zone 1, Class I, Division 1

0.34 mm2 (22 AWG)

80 m (270 ft)

0.50 mm2 (20 AWG)

120 m (400 ft)

0.75 mm2 (18 AWG)

180 m (600 ft)

1.00 mm2 (17 AWG)

240 m (800 ft)

1.50 mm2 (15 AWG)

300 m (1 000 ft)

35Electrical connection

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

7.1.3

Terminal assignment

Transmitter: supply voltage, input/outputs
The terminal assignment of the inputs and outputs depends on the individual orderversion of the device. The device-specific terminal assignment is documented on anadhesive label in the terminal cover.
Supply voltage
1 (+)

Input/output 1

2 (–)

Input/output 2

PROFINET(RJ45 connector)

24 (+)

Input/output 3

25 (–)

22 (+)

23 (–)

Device-specific terminal assignment: adhesive label interminal cover.

Terminal assignment of the remote display and operating module →  43.

7.1.4

Device plugs available

Device plugs may not be used in hazardous areas!
Order code for "Input; output 1", option RA "PROFINET"
Order code for"Electrical connection"

2

3

L, N, P, U

Connector M12 × 1–

Connector M12 × 1

Connector M12 × 1

R
1)

2)

Cable entry/connection

1) 2)

,S

1) 2)

,T

1) 2)

,V

1) 2)

Cannot be combined with an external WLAN antenna (order code for "Enclosed accessories", option P8) of
an RJ45 M12 adapter for the service interface (order code for "Accessories mounted", option NB) or of theremote display and operating module DKX001.
Suitable for integrating the device in a ring topology.

7.1.5

Pin assignment of device plug
Pin

2

3

1

4
A0032047

7.1.6

Assignment

1

+

TD +

2

+

RD +

3

-

TD –

4

-

RD –

CodingPlug/socket

D

SocketPreparing the measuring device

NOTICE
Insufficient sealing of the housing!
Operational reliability of the measuring device could be compromised.
‣ Use suitable cable glands corresponding to the degree of protection.
1.

36

Remove dummy plug if present.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINETElectrical connection

2.

If the measuring device is supplied without cable glands:
Provide suitable cable gland for corresponding connecting cable.

3.

If the measuring device is supplied with cable glands:
Observe requirements for connecting cables →  33.

7.2

Connecting the measuring device

NOTICE
Limitation of electrical safety due to incorrect connection!
‣ Have electrical connection work carried out by appropriately trained specialists only.
‣ Observe applicable federal/national installation codes and regulations.
‣ Comply with local workplace safety regulations.
‣ Always connect the protective ground cable  before connecting additional cables.
‣ For use in potentially explosive atmospheres, observe the information in the devicespecific Ex documentation.

7.2.1

Connecting the transmitter
1
2
3
4

A0026781

1
2
3

4

Terminal connection for supply voltage
Terminal connection for signal transmission, input/output
Terminal connection for signal transmission, input/output or terminal connection for network connection via
service interface (CDI-RJ45); optional: connection for external WLAN antenna or remote display andoperating module DKX001
Protective earth (PE)In addition to connecting the device via PROFINET and the available inputs/outputs,
additional connection options are also available:• Integrate into a network via the service interface (CDI-RJ45) →  41.
• Integrate the device into a ring topology →  42.
Connecting the PROFINET connector
3.
n
f ne
öf

Nicht

Nicht

un
ter

un
te r

n
f ne
öf
ES

C

ES
C

–

–

+

+

E

E
ES
C

ar

3 mm

+

4.

1.

ar

2.

e

e

–

E

3.
A0029813

Endress+Hauser

1.

Loosen the securing clamp of the connection compartment cover.

2.

Unscrew the connection compartment cover.

3.

Squeeze the tabs of the display module holder together.

37

Electrical connection

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Remove the display module holder.

I/O

e

e

Nicht

6.

Powr ente fn nun g öf whe
enichtnnunNpat op
d vrir
S nozeDoergis ouionen patens
Neus
so
I/O

un
te r

un
te r

er

I/O

n
f ne
öf

Nich PoSp tan un w
Do nu te er
en no ngrer töfNe gi op fn
so pa zeden when
us s outens vr en
ionir

n
f ne
öf

Nich PoSp tan un w
Do nu te er
en no ngrer töfNe gi op fn
so pa zeden when
us s outens vr en
ionir

Nicht

4.

ar

ar

ES

ES

C

–

C

–
+

+
E

E

5.
A00298145.

Attach the holder to the edge of the electronics compartment.

6.

Open the terminal cover.
11.
22 mm
24 mm

9.

7.

Nich
t

un
te r

n
f ne
öf

N
Spicht Pow
a u
D nn nte er
eno no ungre töN rgizop ffn
soe pa eden w en
us s oheten uvnsiorir
n

8.

e

2
≤4

ar

)
.6

(1

10.

A0033722

7.

Push the cable through the cable entry . To ensure tight sealing, do not remove thesealing ring from the cable entry.

8.

Strip the cable and cable ends and connect to the RJ45 connector.

9.

Connect the protective ground.

10. Plug in the RJ45 connector.
11. Firmly tighten the cable glands.
 This concludes the PROFINET connection process.

38

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINETElectrical connection

Connecting the supply voltage and additional inputs/outputs
1.

2.
10 (0.4)

Nicht

un
ter

n
f ne
öf

e

mm (in)
ar

ES

C

–

3.

+
E

A0033983

1.

Push the cable through the cable entry . To ensure tight sealing, do not remove thesealing ring from the cable entry.

2.

Strip the cable and cable ends. In the case of stranded cables, also fit ferrules.

3.

Connect the protective ground.

5.

n
f ne
öf

Nicht

un
te r

22 mm

e

24 mm
ar
ES

C

–
+
E

4.
A0033984

Endress+Hauser

4.

Connect the cable in accordance with the terminal assignment .
 Signal cable terminal assignment: The device-specific terminal assignment isdocumented on an adhesive label in the terminal cover.
Supply voltage terminal assignment: Adhesive label in the terminal cover or→  36.

5.

Firmly tighten the cable glands.
 This concludes the cable connection process.

6.

Close the terminal cover.

7.

Fit the display module holder in the electronics compartment.

8.

Screw on the connection compartment cover.

9.

Secure the securing clamp of the connection compartment cover.

39

Electrical connection

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Removing a cable

3 (0.12)1.

2.

A0029598640

Engineering unit mm (in)1.

To remove a cable from the terminal, use a flat-blade screwdriver to push the slot
between the two terminal holes2.

while simultaneously pulling the cable end out of the terminal.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINETElectrical connection

7.2.2

Integrating the transmitter into a network

This section only presents the basic options for integrating the device into a network.
For information on the procedure to follow to connect the transmitter correctly →  37.
Integrating via the service interface
The device is integrated via the connection to the service interface (CDI-RJ45).
Note the following when connecting:• Recommended cable: CAT 5e, CAT 6 or CAT 7, with shielded connector (e.g. brand:
YAMAICHI ; Part No Y-ConProfixPlug63 / Prod. ID: 82-006660)• Maximum cable thickness: 6 mm
• Length of connector including bend protection: 42 mm• Bending radius: 5 x cable thickness

un
te r

n
f ne
öf

N
Spicht Pow
a u
Do nnunte er
en no ngre töNe rgizope ffne
so pa ed n w n
us s oheten uvnsiorir
n

e

Nich
t

I/O

ar

2
≤4
)

.6
(1

1

A0033703

1

Service interface (CDI-RJ45)

An adapter for RJ45 and the M12 connector is optionally available:
Order code for "Accessories", option NB: "Adapter RJ45 M12 (service interface)"
The adapter connects the service interface (CDI-RJ45) to an M12 connector mounted
in the cable entry. Therefore the connection to the service interface can be established
via an M12 connector without opening the device.

Endress+Hauser

41

Electrical connection

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Integrating into a ring topology
The device is integrated via the terminal connection for signal transmission (output 1) andthe connection to the service interface (CDI-RJ45).
Note the following when connecting:• Recommended cable: CAT5e, CAT6 or CAT7, with shielded connector (e.g. brand:
YAMAICHI ; Part No Y-ConProfixPlug63 / Prod. ID: 82-006660)• Maximum cable thickness: 6 mm
• Length of connector including bend protection: 42 mm• Bending radius: 2.5 x cable thickness

e

Nich
t

un
te r

n
f ne
öf

N
Spicht Pow
a u
Do nnunte er
en no ngre töNe rgizope ffne
so pa ed n w n
us s oheten uvnsiorir
n

ar

2
≤4
)

.6
(1

1
2

A0033717

1
2

PROFINET connection
Service interface (CDI-RJ45)

An adapter for RJ45 and the M12 connector is optionally available:
Order code for "Accessories", option NB: "Adapter RJ45 M12 (service interface)"
The adapter connects the service interface (CDI-RJ45) to an M12 connector mounted
in the cable entry. Therefore the connection to the service interface can be established
via an M12 connector without opening the device.

42

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINETElectrical connection

7.2.3

Connecting the remote display and operating module DKX001

The remote display and operating module DKX001 is available as an optional extra→  189.

Gnd

Vcc• The measuring device is always supplied with a dummy cover when the remote
display and operating module DKX001 is ordered directly with the measuring
device. Display or operation at the transmitter is not possible in this case.
• If ordered subsequently, the remote display and operating module DKX001 may not
be connected at the same time as the existing measuring device display module.
Only one display or operation unit may be connected to the transmitter at any one
time.

A

B

81 82 83 84
1
2

3

Gnd

4
5

Vcc

81 82 83 84
A

B

A0027518

1
2
3
4
5

Remote display and operating module DKX001
Protective earth (PE)Connecting cable
Measuring device
Protective earth (PE)

7.3

Ensuring potential equalization

7.3.1

Requirements

LCAUTION
Electrode damage can result in the complete failure of the device!
‣ Same electrical potential for the fluid and sensor‣ Company-internal grounding concepts‣ Pipe material and grounding

7.3.2

Connection example, standard scenario

Metal, grounded pipe

A00163157

Endress+Hauser

Potential equalization via measuring tube

43

Electrical connection

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

7.3.3

Connection example in special situations

Unlined and ungrounded metal pipe
This connection method also applies in situations where:• The customary potential equalization is not used
• Equalizing currents are present
Copper wire, at least 6 mm2 (0.0093 in2)

Ground cable

DN ≤ 300

DN ≥ 350
A0029338

8

Potential equalization via ground terminal and pipe flanges

1.

Connect both sensor flanges to the pipe flange via a ground cable and ground them.

2.

If DN ≤ 300 (12"): Mount the ground cable directly on the conductive flange coatingof the sensor with the flange screws.

3.

If DN ≥ 350 (14"): Mount the ground cable directly on the metal transport bracket.
Observe screw tightening torques: see the Sensor Brief Operating Instructions.

4.

Connect the connection housing of the transmitter or sensor to ground potential bymeans of the ground terminal provided for the purpose.

Plastic pipe or pipe with insulating liner
This connection method also applies in situations where:• The customary potential equalization is not used
• Equalizing currents are present
Ground cable

Copper wire, at least 6 mm2 (0.0093 in2)

A0029339

9

Potential equalization via ground terminal and ground disks

1.

Connect the ground disks to the ground terminal via the ground cable.

2.

Connect the ground disks to ground potential.

Pipe with a cathodic protection unit
This connection method is only used if the following two conditions are met:
• Metal pipe without liner or pipe with electrically conductive liner• Cathodic protection is integrated in the personal protection equipment
44

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINETElectrical connection

Copper wire, at least 6 mm2 (0.0093 in2)

Ground cable+–

A0029340

Prerequisite: The sensor is installed in the pipe in a way that provides electrical insulation.
1.

Connect the two flanges of the pipe to one another via a ground cable.

2.

Guide the shield of the signal lines through a capacitor.

3.

Connect the measuring device to the power supply such that it is floating in relation
to the protective ground (isolation transformer).

7.4

Special connection instructions

7.4.1

Connection examples

PROFINET
1

2

3

4

5

5
A0028767

 10
1
2
3
4
5

Endress+Hauser

Connection example for PROFINET

Control system (e.g. PLC)
Ethernet switch
Observe cable specifications
Device plug
Transmitter

45

Electrical connection

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINETPROFINET: MRP (Media Redundancy Protocol)
1

3

2

5

4

4

A0027544

1
2
3
4
5

Control system (e.g. PLC)
Ethernet switch
Observe cable specifications →  33
Transmitter
Connecting cable between the two transmitters

PROFINET: system redundancy S2
1

2

4

3
5

5

5

A0039553

 11
1
2
3
4
5

Connection example for system redundancy S2Control system 1 (e.g. PLC)
Synchronization of control systems
Control system 2 (e.g. PLC)
Industrial Ethernet Managed Switch
Transmitter

Current output 4-20 mA
1

2

3
4...20 mA
A0028758

 12
1
2
3

46

Connection example for 4-20 mA current output (active)

Automation system with current input (e.g. PLC)
Analog display unit: observe maximum load
Transmitter

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINETElectrical connection

1

2

3

4
4...20 mA

A0028759

 13
1
2
3
4

Connection example for 4-20 mA current output (passive)

Automation system with current input (e.g. PLC)
Active barrier for power supply (e.g. RN221N)
Analog display unit: observe maximum load
Transmitter

Pulse/frequency output

1

2

3

12345
A0028761

 14
1
2
3

Connection example for pulse/frequency output (passive)

Automation system with pulse/frequency input (e.g. PLC)
Power supply
Transmitter: Observe input values →  196

Switch output

1

2

3

A0028760

 15
1
2
3

Endress+Hauser

Connection example for switch output (passive)

Automation system with switch input (e.g. PLC)
Power supply
Transmitter: Observe input values →  196

47

Electrical connection

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Relay output

1

2

3

A0028760

 16
1
2
3

Connection example for relay output (passive)

Automation system with relay input (e.g. PLC)
Power supply
Transmitter: Observe input values →  197

Current input
1

2

3

4

A0028915

 17
1
2
3
4

Connection example for 4 to 20 mA current input

Power supply
Terminal box
External measuring device (to read in pressure or temperature, for instance)
Transmitter

Status input

1

2

3

A0028764

 18
1
2
3

48

Connection example for status input

Automation system with status output (e.g. PLC)
Power supply
Transmitter

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINETElectrical connection

7.5

Hardware settings

7.5.1

Setting the device nameA measuring point can be quickly identified within a plant on the basis of the tag name.
The tag name is equivalent to the device name (name of station of the PROFINET
specification). The factory-assigned device name can be changed using the DIP switches orthe automation system.
Example of device name (factory setting): EH-Promag300-XXXX
EH

Endress+Hauser

PromagInstrument family

300

Transmitter

XXXX

Serial number of the device

The device name currently used is displayed in Setup → Name of station is also displayed.
Setting the device name using the DIP switches
The last part of the device name can be set using DIP switches 1-8. The address range is
between 1 and 254 (factory setting: serial number of the device )Overview of the DIP switches
DIP switch

Bit

1

128

2

64

3

32

4

16

5

8

6

4

7

2

8

1

Description

Configurable part of the device nameExample: Setting the device name EH-PROMAG300-065
DIP switch

ON/OFF

Bit

1

OFF

–

2

ON

64

3…7

OFF

–

8

ON

1

Serial number of the device:065

Device name

EH-PROMAG300-065

Setting the device nameRisk of electric shock when opening the transmitter housing.
‣ Before opening the transmitter housing:‣ Disconnect the device from the power supply.
The default IP address may not be activated →  50.

Endress+Hauser

49

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

128
64
32
16
8
4
2
1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Name of Station

Electrical connection

A00344981.

Depending on the housing version, loosen the securing clamp or fixing screw of the
housing cover.

2.

Depending on the housing version, unscrew or open the housing cover anddisconnect the local display from the main electronics module where necessary .

3.

Set the desired device name using the corresponding DIP switches on the
I/O electronics module.

4.

Reverse the removal procedure to reassemble the transmitter.

5.

Reconnect the device to the power supply.
 The configured device address is used once the device is restarted.

Setting the device name via the automation system
DIP switches 1-8 must all be set to OFF (factory setting) or all be set to ON to be able to set
the device name via the automation system.
The complete device name (name of station) can be changed individually via theautomation system.
• The serial number used as part of the device name in the factory setting is not
saved. It is not possible to reset the device name to the factory setting with theserial number. The value "0" is used instead of the serial number.
• When assigning the device name via the automation system:
assign the device name in lower case letters.

7.5.2

Activating the default IP address

The default IP address 192.168.1.212 can be activated by DIP switch.
Activating the default IP address by DIP switch
Risk of electric shock when opening the transmitter housing.
‣ Before opening the transmitter housing:‣ Disconnect the device from the power supply.

Off On1
2
3
4A00344991.

50

Depending on the housing version, loosen the securing clamp or fixing screw of the
housing cover.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINETElectrical connection2.

Depending on the housing version, unscrew or open the housing cover anddisconnect the local display from the main electronics module where necessary .

3.

Set DIP switch No. 2 on the I/O electronics module from OFF → ON.

4.

Reverse the removal procedure to reassemble the transmitter.

5.

Reconnect the device to the power supply.
 The default IP address is used once the device is restarted.

7.6

Ensuring the degree of protection

The measuring device fulfills all the requirements for the IP66/67 degree of protection,
Type 4X enclosure.
To guarantee IP66/67 degree of protection, Type 4X enclosure, carry out the following
steps after the electrical connection:
1.

Check that the housing seals are clean and fitted correctly.

2.

Dry, clean or replace the seals if necessary.

3.

Tighten all housing screws and screw covers.

4.

Firmly tighten the cable glands.

5.

To ensure that moisture does not enter the cable entry:
Route the cable so that it loops down before the cable entry ("water trap").
A0029278

Endress+Hauser

6.

Insert dummy plugs into unused cable entries.

7.7

Post-connection check

Are cables or the device undamaged (visual inspection)?



Do the cables used meet the requirements?

Do the cables have adequate strain relief?



Are all the cable glands installed, firmly tightened and leak-tight? Cable run with "water trap"→  51?



If supply voltage is present, do values appear on the display module?

Is the potential equalization established correctly ?



51

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

8

Operation options

8.1

Overview of operation options

ESC

-

+

1

E

2

3

4

5

6
A0034513

1
2
3
4
5
6

52

Local operation via display module
Computer with Web browser (e.g. Internet Explorer) or with operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare, AMS
Device Manager, SIMATIC PDM)
Field Xpert SFX350 or SFX370
Field Xpert SMT70
Mobile handheld terminal
Control system (e.g. PLC)

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Operation options

8.2

Structure and function of the operating menu

8.2.1

Structure of the operating menu

For an overview of the operating menu for experts: "Description of Device Parameters"
document supplied with the device→  218

Operating menu for operators and maintenances
Language
Operatation!
Language

Operator

Parameter 1
Parameter n
Submenu 1
Submenu n
Setup

Device tag

Wizard n / Parameter nAdvanced setup

Enter access code
Parameter 1

Task-oriented

Maintenance

Wizard 1 / Parameter 1

Parameter n
Submenu 1
Submenu n
Diagnostics

Parameter 1
Parameter n
Submenu 1
Submenu nOperating menu for experts
ExpertAccess status display
Parameter n

Sensor
Input
OutputCommunication

Function-oriented

ExpertSystemApplication
Diagnostics

A0018237-EN

 19

Endress+Hauser

Schematic structure of the operating menu

53

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

8.2.2

Operating philosophy

The individual parts of the operating menu are assigned to certain user roles (operator,
maintenance etc.). Each user role contains typical tasks within the device lifecycle.
Menu/parameter
Languagetask-oriented

Operation
Setup

User role and tasks

Content/meaning

Role "Operator", "Maintenance"
Tasks during operation:• Configuring the operational
display• Reading measured values• Defining the operating language• Defining the Web server operating language• Resetting and controlling totalizers"Maintenance" roleCommissioning:• Configuration of themeasurement• Configuration of the inputs andoutputs• Configuration of thecommunication interface

Wizards for fast commissioning:• Setting the system units• Displaying the I/O/configuration• Configuring the inputs• Configuring the outputs• Configuration of the operational display• Setting the low flow cut off• Configuring empty pipe detection• Configuring the operational display (e.g. display format, display contrast)• Resetting and controlling totalizers

Advanced setup• For more customized configuration of the measurement (adaptation to
special measuring conditions)• Configuration of totalizers• Configuration of electrode cleaning (optional)• Configuring the WLAN settings• Administration (define access code, reset measuring device)
Diagnostics

Expert54function-oriented"Maintenance" role
Fault elimination:• Diagnostics and elimination ofprocess and device errors• Measured value simulation

Contains all parameters for error detection and analyzing process and device
errors:• Diagnostic list
Contains up to 5 currently pending diagnostic messages.
• Event logbook
Contains event messages that have occurred.
• Device information
Contains information for identifying the device.
• Measured values
Contains all current measured values.
• Data logging submenu with "Extended HistoROM" order option
Storage and visualization of measured values• Heartbeat
The functionality of the device is checked on demand and the verification
results are documented.
• Simulation
Is used to simulate measured values or output values.

Tasks that require detailed
knowledge of the function of thedevice:• Commissioning measurements
under difficult conditions• Optimal adaptation of themeasurement to difficult
conditions• Detailed configuration of thecommunication interface• Error diagnostics in difficult cases

Contains all the parameters of the device and makes it possible to accessthese parameters directly using an access code. The structure of this menu isbased on the function blocks of the device:• SystemContains all higher-order device parameters which do not concern themeasurement or the communication interface.
• Sensor
Configuration of the measurement.
• Input
Configuration of the status input.
• Output
Configuration of the analog current outputs as well as the pulse/frequency
and switch output.
• Communication
Configuration of the digital communication interface and the Web server.
• Application
Configuration of the functions that go beyond the actual measurement(e.g. totalizer).
• Diagnostics
Error detection and analysis of process and device errors and for device
simulation and Heartbeat Technology.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Operation options

8.3

Access to the operating menu via the local display

8.3.1

Operational display
1
2

XXXXXXXXX

4F

31120.50l/h

5A0029346

1
2
3
4
5

Operational display
Device tag
Status area
Display area for measured values (4-line)
Operating elements→  60

Status area
The following symbols appear in the status area of the operational display at the top right:• Status signals→  148• F: Failure• C: Function check• S: Out of specification• M: Maintenance required• Diagnostic behavior→  149• : Alarm• : Warning• : Locking (the device is locked via the hardware )• : Communication (communication via remote operation is active)
Display area
In the display area, each measured value is prefaced by certain symbol types for further
description:
Measured values
SymbolMeaning
Volume flow
Conductivity
Mass flow
Totalizer
The measurement channel number indicates which of the three totalizers is displayed.
Status input

Endress+Hauser

55

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Measurement channel numbers
SymbolMeaning
Measurement channel 1 to 4

The measurement channel number is displayed only if more than one channel is present for the same measured
variable type (e.g. Totalizer 1 to 3).

Diagnostic behavior
The diagnostic behavior pertains to a diagnostic event that is relevant to the displayed measured variable.
For information on the symbols →  149

The number and display format of the measured values can be configured via theFormat display parameter (→  109).

8.3.2

2

Navigation view
In the submenu

In the wizard

1

10091-1/../Operation
Access stat.disp

3/../Curr. output 1
S
Assign curr.
Volume flow

2

Operator
Locking status
Display

44

5

5A0013993-EN

1
2
3
4
5

3

A0016327-EN

Navigation view
Navigation path to current position
Status area
Display area for navigation
Operating elements →  60

Navigation path
The navigation path - displayed at the top left in the navigation view - consists of thefollowing elements:• In the submenu:
Display symbol for menu
• In the wizard:
Display symbol for wizard↓
ExamplesOmission symbol for
operating menu levels in
betweenName of current• Submenu• Wizard• Parameters

↓

↓

/ ../

Display/ ../Display

For more information about the icons in the menu, refer to the "Display area" section→  5756

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Operation options

Status area
The following appears in the status area of the navigation view in the top right corner:• In the submenu• The direct access code for the parameter you are navigating to (e.g. 0022-1)• If a diagnostic event is present, the diagnostic behavior and status signal• In the wizard
If a diagnostic event is present, the diagnostic behavior and status signal• For information on the diagnostic behavior and status signal →  148• For information on the function and entry of the direct access code →  62
Display area
Menus
SymbolMeaning
Operation
Appears:• In the menu next to the "Operation" selection• At the left in the navigation path in the Operation menu
Setup
Appears:• In the menu next to the "Setup" selection• At the left in the navigation path in the Setup menu
Diagnostics
Appears:• In the menu next to the "Diagnostics" selection• At the left in the navigation path in the Diagnostics menu
ExpertAppears:• In the menu next to the "Expert" selection• At the left in the navigation path in the Expert menu

Submenus, wizards, parameters
SymbolMeaning
Submenu
WizardParameters within a wizard

 No display symbol exists for parameters in submenus.
Locking
SymbolMeaningParameter locked
When displayed in front of a parameter name, indicates that the parameter is locked.
• By a user-specific access code
• By the hardware write protection switch

Wizard operation
SymbolMeaning
Switches to the previous parameter.
Confirms the parameter value and switches to the next parameter.
Opens the editing view of the parameter.

Endress+Hauser

57

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

8.3.3

Editing view

Numeric editor
1

0
5
+

2

1
6
–

+0.000 Xx
2
3
8
7

4
9

3

4
A0034250

 20
1
2
3
4

For entering values in parameters (e.g. limit values)

Entry display area
Input screen
Confirm, delete or reject entry
Operating elements

Text editor
1

2

XxxxxxxA B C D E F G H I J K
L M N O P Q R S T U V W
X Y Z

6
7

3
5
4

A0034114

 21
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

For entering text in parameters (e.g. tag name)

Entry display area
Current input screen
Change input screen
Operating elements
Move entry position
Delete entry
Reject or confirm entry

Using the operating elements in the editing viewOperating key(s)Meaning
Minus keyMove the entry position to the left.
Plus keyMove the entry position to the right.

58

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Operation options

Operating key(s)MeaningEnter key
• Press the key briefly: confirm your selection.
• Press the key for 2 s: confirm the entry.

+

Escape key combination (press keys simultaneously)
Close the editing view without accepting the changes.

Input screens
SymbolMeaning
Upper case
Lower caseNumbers
Punctuation marks and special characters: = + – * / ² ³ ¼ ½ ¾ ( ) [ ] < > { }Punctuation marks and special characters: ' " `^. , ; : ? ! % µ ° € $ £ ¥ § @ # / \ I ~ & _Umlauts and accents

Controlling data entries
SymbolMeaningMove entry position
Reject entry
Confirm entry
Delete character immediately to the left of the entry position
Delete character immediately to the right of the entry position
Clear all the characters entered

Endress+Hauser

59

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

8.3.4

Operating elements

Operating key(s)Meaning
Minus key
In a menu, submenu
Moves the selection bar upwards in a picklist.
With a Wizard
Confirms the parameter value and goes to the previous parameter.
With a text and numeric editor
Move the entry position to the left.
Plus key
In a menu, submenu
Moves the selection bar downwards in a picklist.
With a Wizard
Confirms the parameter value and goes to the next parameter.
With a text and numeric editor
Move the entry position to the right.
Enter key
For operational display
Pressing the key briefly opens the operating menu.
In a menu, submenu• Pressing the key briefly:• Opens the selected menu, submenu or parameter.
• Starts the wizard.
• If help text is open, closes the help text of the parameter.
• Pressing the key for 2 s for parameter:
If present, opens the help text for the function of the parameter.
With a Wizard
Opens the editing view of the parameter.
With a text and numeric editor• Press the key briefly: confirm your selection.
• Press the key for 2 s: confirm the entry.
Escape key combination (press keys simultaneously)
In a menu, submenu• Pressing the key briefly:• Exits the current menu level and takes you to the next higher level.
• If help text is open, closes the help text of the parameter.
• Pressing the key for 2 s returns you to the operational display ("home position").

+With a Wizard
Exits the wizard and takes you to the next higher level.
With a text and numeric editor
Close the editing view without accepting the changes.
Minus/Enter key combination (press the keys simultaneously)• If the keypad lock is active:
Press the key for 3 s: deactivate the keypad lock.
• If the keypad lock is not active:
Press the key for 3 s: the context menu opens along with the option for activating the
keypad lock.

+

8.3.5

Opening the context menu

Using the context menu, the user can call up the following menus quickly and directly fromthe operational display:• Setup• Data backup• Simulation

60

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Operation options

Calling up and closing the context menu
The user is in the operational display.
1.

Press the  and  keys for longer than 3 seconds.
 The context menu opens.
XXXXXXXXXX
Setup
Conf.backup
Simulation
Keylock on

l/hA0034608-EN

2.

Press  +  simultaneously.
 The context menu is closed and the operational display appears.

Calling up the menu via the context menu

Endress+Hauser

1.

Open the context menu.

2.

Press  to navigate to the desired menu.

3.

Press  to confirm the selection.
 The selected menu opens.

61

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

8.3.6

Navigating and selecting from list

Different operating elements are used to navigate through the operating menu. The
navigation path is displayed on the left in the header. Icons are displayed in front of theindividual menus. These icons are also shown in the header during navigation.
For an explanation of the navigation view with symbols and operating elements→  56
Example: Setting the number of displayed measured values to "2 values"
XXXXXXXXX

20.50
1.

0104-1Main menu
Language

EnglishDisplay/operat.
Setup

2.

Main menu
Language
Display/operat.
Setup/ ../Display/operat.

0091-1

Access stat.disp

3.

Operator
Locking status
Display/ ../Display/operat.
Locking status
Display4.

/ ../Display

0098-1

Format display
1 value, max.
Contrast display
Display intervall

5.

/ ../Format display
1 value, max.
Bargr. + 1 value
2 values
Val. large+2val.

6.

0098-10098-1/ ../Format display
1 value, max.
Bargr. + 1 value
2 values
Val. large+2val.

7.

XXXXXXXXX

8.

2s

10.50
mA
2800
Hz
A0029562-EN

8.3.7

Calling the parameter directly

A parameter number is assigned to every parameter to be able to access a parameter
directly via the onsite display. Entering this access code in the Direct access parameter
calls up the desired parameter directly.
Navigation path
Expert → Direct access62

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Operation options

The direct access code consists of a 5-digit number (at maximum) and the channel
number, which identifies the channel of a process variable: e.g. 00914-2. In the navigation
view, this appears on the right-hand side in the header of the selected parameter.
00914-2

1

A0029414

1

Direct access code

Note the following when entering the direct access code:• The leading zeros in the direct access code do not have to be entered.
Example: Enter "914" instead of "00914"• If no channel number is entered, channel 1 is accessed automatically.
Example: Enter 00914 → Assign process variable parameter• If a different channel is accessed: Enter the direct access code with the corresponding
channel number.
Example: Enter 00914-2 → Assign process variable parameter
For the direct access codes of the individual parameters, see the "Description of Device
Parameters" document for the device

8.3.8

Calling up help text

Help text is available for some parameters and can be called up from the navigation view.
The help text provides a brief explanation of the parameter function and thereby supports
swift and safe commissioning.
Calling up and closing the help text
The user is in the navigation view and the selection bar is on a parameter.
1.

Press  for 2 s.
 The help text for the selected parameter opens.
Ent. access code
Enter access code to disable
write protec.

A0014002-EN

 22

2.

Example: Help text for parameter "Enter access code"

Press  +  simultaneously.
 The help text is closed.

8.3.9

Changing the parameters

Parameters can be changed via the numeric editor or text editor.
• Numeric editor: Change values in a parameter, e.g. specifications for limit values.
• Text editor: Enter text in a parameter, e.g. tag name.
A message is displayed if the value entered is outside the permitted value range.

Endress+Hauser

63

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Ent. access code
Invalid or out of range input
value
Min:0
Max:9999
A0014049-EN

For a description of the editing view - consisting of the text editor and numeric editor- with symbols →  58, for a description of the operating elements →  60

8.3.10User roles and related access authorization

The two user roles "Operator" and "Maintenance" have different write access to theparameters if the customer defines a user-specific access code. This protects the device
configuration via the local display from unauthorized access →  130.
Defining access authorization for user roles
An access code is not yet defined when the device is delivered from the factory. Accessauthorization (read and write access) to the device is not restricted and corresponds to the"Maintenance" user role.

‣ Define the access code.
 The "Operator" user role is redefined in addition to the "Maintenance" user role.
Access authorization differs for the two user roles.
Access authorization to parameters: "Maintenance" user role
Access code status

Read access

Write accessAn access code has not yet been defined(factory setting).



After an access code has been defined.



 1)

1)

The user only has write access after entering the access code.

Access authorization to parameters: "Operator" user role
Access code status
After an access code has been defined.
1)

Read access

Write access



–– 1)

Despite the defined access code, certain parameters can always be modified and thus are excepted fromthe write protection, as they do not affect the measurement. Refer to the "Write protection via access code"
sectionThe user role with which the user is currently logged on is indicated by the Accessstatus parameter. Navigation path: Operation → Access status

8.3.11Disabling write protection via access code

If the -symbol appears on the local display in front of a parameter, the parameter iswrite-protected by a user-specific access code and its value cannot be changed at the
moment using local operation →  130.
Parameter write protection via local operation can be disabled by entering the user-specificaccess code in the Enter access code parameter (→  115) via the respective access
option.
1.
64After you press , the input prompt for the access code appears.
Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Operation options

2.

Enter the access code.
 The -symbol in front of the parameters disappears; all previously writeprotected parameters are now re-enabled.

8.3.12

Enabling and disabling the keypad lockThe keypad lock makes it possible to block access to the entire operating menu via local
operation. As a result, it is no longer possible to navigate through the operating menu orchange the values of individual parameters. Users can only read the measured values on
the operational display.
The keypad lock is switched on and off via the context menu.
Switching on the keypad lockThe keypad lock is switched on automatically:• If the device has not been operated via the display for > 1 minute.
• Each time the device is restarted.
To activate the keylock manually:1.

The device is in the measured value display.
Press the  and  keys for 3 seconds.
 A context menu appears.

2.

In the context menu select the Keylock on option.
 The keypad lock is switched on.
If the user attempts to access the operating menu while the keypad lock is active, theKeylock on message appears.

Switching off the keypad lock

‣ The keypad lock is switched on.
Press the  and  keys for 3 seconds.
 The keypad lock is switched off.

8.4

Access to the operating menu via the Web browser

8.4.1

Function range

Thanks to the integrated Web server, the device can be operated and configured via a Web
browser and via a service interface (CDI-RJ45) or via a WLAN interface. The structure of
the operating menu is the same as for the local display. In addition to the measured values,
status information on the device is also displayed and allows the user to monitor the statusof the device. Furthermore the device data can be managed and the network parameters
can be configured.
A device that has a WLAN interface (can be ordered as an option) is required for the
WLAN connection: order code for "Display; operation", option G "4-line, illuminated; touch
control + WLAN". The device acts as an Access Point and enables communication bycomputer or a mobile handheld terminal.
For additional information on the Web server, refer to the Special Documentation forthe device

Endress+Hauser

65

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

8.4.2

Prerequisites

Computer hardware
Hardware

Interface
CDI-RJ45

WLAN

Interface

The computer must have an RJ45
interface.

The operating unit must have a
WLAN interface.

Connection

Standard Ethernet cable with RJ45
connector.

Connection via Wireless LAN.

ScreenRecommended size: ≥12" (depends on the screen resolution)

Computer software
Software

Interface
CDI-RJ45

Recommended operating
systems

WLAN• Microsoft Windows 7 or higher.
• Mobile operating systems:• iOS• Android Microsoft Windows XP is supported.
Web browsers supported• Microsoft Internet Explorer 8 or higher• Microsoft Edge
• Mozilla Firefox• Google Chrome• SafariComputer settings
Settings

Interface
CDI-RJ45

WLAN

User rights

Appropriate user rights (e.g. administrator rights) for TCP/IP and proxy server
settings are necessary (for adjusting the IP address, subnet mask etc.).

Proxy server settings of the
Web browser

The Web browser setting Use a Proxy Server for Your LAN must be
deselected .

JavaScript

JavaScript must be enabled.
JavaScript cannot be enabled: Ifenter
http://192.168.1.212/basic.html in the address line of the Webbrowser. A fully functional but simplified version of the operating menu
structure starts in the Web browser.
installing a new firmware version: To enable correct data display, Whenclear the temporary memory (cache) of the Web browser under Internet
options.

Network connections

Only the active network connections to the measuring device should be used.
Switch off all other network
connections such as WLAN.

Switch off all other network
connections.

In the event of connection problems: →  145

66

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Operation options

Measuring device: Via CDI-RJ45 service interface
Device

CDI-RJ45 service interface

Measuring device

The measuring device has an RJ45 interface.

Web server

Web server must be enabled; factory setting: ON

 For information on enabling the Web server →  71
Measuring device: via WLAN interface
DeviceWLAN interface

Measuring device

The measuring device has a WLAN antenna:• Transmitter with integrated WLAN antenna• Transmitter with external WLAN antenna

Web server

Web server and WLAN must be enabled; factory setting: ON

 For information on enabling the Web server →  71
8.4.3

Establishing a connection

Via service interface (CDI-RJ45)
Preparing the measuring device
1.

Depending on the housing version:
Release the securing clamp or securing screw of the housing cover.

2.

Depending on the housing version:
Unscrew or open the housing cover.

3.

The location of the connection socket depends on the measuring device and thecommunication protocol:
Connect the computer to the RJ45 connector via the standard Ethernet connecting
cable .

Configuring the Internet protocol of the computer
The IP address can be assigned to the measuring device in a variety of ways:• Dynamic Configuration Protocol (DCP), factory setting:
The IP address is automatically assigned to the measuring device by the automation
system (e.g. Siemens S7).
• Hardware addressing:
The IP address is set via DIP switches →  49.
• Software addressing:
The IP address is entered via the IP address parameter (→  93) .
• DIP switch for "Default IP address":
To establish the network connection via the service interface (CDI-RJ45): the fixed IP
address 192.168.1.212 is used →  50.
The measuring device works with the Dynamic Configuration Protocol (DCP), on leaving
the factory, i.e. the IP address of the measuring device is automatically assigned by theautomation system (e.g. Siemens S7).
To establish a network connection via the service interface (CDI-RJ45): set the "Default IP
address" DIP switch to ON. The measuring device then has the fixed IP address:
192.168.1.212. This address can now be used to establish the network connection.

Endress+Hauser

1.

Via DIP switch 2, activate the default IP address 192.168.1.212: →  50.

2.

Switch on the measuring device.

3.

Connect to the computer using a cable →  73.
67

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

4.

If a 2nd network card is not used, close all the applications on the notebook.
 Applications requiring Internet or a network, such as e-mail, SAP applications,Internet or Windows Explorer.

5.

Close any open Internet browsers.

6.

Configure the properties of the Internet protocol (TCP/IP) as defined in the table:

IP address

192.168.1.XXX; for XXX all numerical sequences except: 0, 212 and 255 → e.g.
192.168.1.213

Subnet mask

255.255.255.0

Default gateway

192.168.1.212 or leave cells empty

Via WLAN interface
Configuring the Internet protocol of the mobile terminal
NOTICE
If the WLAN connection is lost during the configuration, settings made may be lost.
‣ Make sure that the WLAN connection is not disconnected while configuring the device.
NOTICEIn principle, avoid simultaneous access to the measuring device via the service
interface (CDI-RJ45) and the WLAN interface from the same mobile terminal. This
could cause a network conflict.
‣ Only activate one service interface (CDI-RJ45 service interface or WLAN interface).
‣ If simultaneous communication is necessary: configure different IP address ranges, e.g.
192.168.0.1 (WLAN interface) and 192.168.1.212 (CDI-RJ45 service interface).
Preparing the mobile terminal‣ Enable WLAN reception on the mobile terminal.
Establishing a connection from the mobile terminal to the measuring device
1.

In the WLAN settings of the mobile terminal:
Select the measuring device using the SSID (e.g. EH_Promag_300_A802000).

2.

If necessary, select the WPA2 encryption method.

3.

Enter the password: serial number of the measuring device ex-works (e.g.
L100A802000).
 LED on display module flashes: it is now possible to operate the measuring device
with the Web browser, FieldCare or DeviceCare.
The serial number can be found on the nameplate.
To ensure the safe and swift assignment of the WLAN network to the measuring
point, it is advisable to change the SSID name. It should be possible to clearly assign
the new SSID name to the measuring point (e.g. tag name) because it is displayed as
the WLAN network.

Disconnecting‣ After configuring the device:
Terminate the WLAN connection between the operating unit and measuring device.
Starting the Web browser
1.

68

Start the Web browser on the computer.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

2.

Operation options

Enter the IP address of the Web server in the address line of the Web browser:
192.168.1.212
 The login page appears.
1

2

3

4

5

6

7
8
9
10
A0029417

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Picture of device
Device name
Device tag
Status signal
Current measured values
Operating language
User role
Access code
Login
Reset access code (→  127)

If a login page does not appear, or if the page is incomplete →  145

8.4.4

Logging on

1.

Select the preferred operating language for the Web browser.

2.

Enter the user-specific access code.

3.

Press OK to confirm your entry.

Access code

0000 (factory setting); can be changed by customer

If no action is performed for 10 minutes, the Web browser automatically returns to
the login page.

Endress+Hauser

69

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

8.4.5

User interface

1
2

3
A0029418

1
2
3Function row
Local display language
Navigation area

Header
The following information appears in the header:• Device name• Device tag• Device status with status signal →  151• Current measured values
Function row
Functions

Meaning

Measured values

Displays the measured values of the measuring device

Menu

70

• Access to the operating menu from the measuring device• The structure of the operating menu is the same as for the local display
detailed information on the structure of the operating menu, see the Operating
 For
Instructions for the measuring device

Device status

Displays the diagnostic messages currently pending, listed in order of priority

Data
management

Data exchange between PC and measuring device:• Device configuration:• Load settings from the device(XML format, save configuration)• Save settings to the device(XML format, restore configuration)• Logbook - Export Event logbook (.csv file)• Documents - Export documents:• Export backup data record(.csv file, create documentation of the measuring point configuration)• Verification report(PDF file, only available with the "Heartbeat Verification" application package)• File for system integration - If using fieldbuses, upload device drivers for system
integration from the measuring device:
PROFINET: GSD file• Firmware update - Flashing a firmware version

Network
configuration

Configuration and checking of all the parameters required for establishing the connection to
the measuring device:• Network settings (e.g. IP address, MAC address)• Device information (e.g. serial number, firmware version)

Logout

End the operation and call up the login page

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Operation options

Navigation area
If a function is selected in the function bar, the submenus of the function open in thenavigation area. The user can now navigate through the menu structure.
Working area
Depending on the selected function and the related submenus, various actions can be
performed in this area:• Configuring parameters• Reading measured values• Calling up help text
• Starting an upload/download

8.4.6

Disabling the Web server

The Web server of the measuring device can be switched on and off as required using the
Web server functionality parameter.
Navigation"Expert" menu → Communication → Web server
Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Web server functionality

Description
Switch the Web server on and off.

Selection• Off• HTML Off• On

Factory setting
On

Function scope of the "Web server functionality" parameter
OptionDescription

Off• The web server is completely disabled.
• Port 80 is locked.

HTML OffThe HTML version of the web server is not available.

On• The complete functionality of the web server is available.
• JavaScript is used.
• The password is transferred in an encrypted state.
• Any change to the password is also transferred in an encrypted state.

Enabling the Web server
If the Web server is disabled it can only be re-enabled with the Web server functionality
parameter via the following operating options:• Via local display• Via Bedientool "FieldCare"• Via "DeviceCare" operating tool

8.4.7

Logging out

Before logging out, perform a data backup via the Data management function(upload configuration from device) if necessary.

Endress+Hauser

1.

Select the Logout entry in the function row.
 The home page with the Login box appears.

2.

Close the Web browser.

71

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

3.

If no longer needed:
Reset modified properties of the Internet protocol (TCP/IP) →  67.
If communication with the Web server was established via the default IP address
192.168.1.212, DIP switch No. 10 must be reset (from ON → OFF). Afterwards, the IP
address of the device is active again for network communication.

8.5

Access to the operating menu via the operating tool

The structure of the operating menu in the operating tools is the same as for operation via
the local display.

8.5.1

Connecting the operating tool

Via PROFINET network
This communication interface is available in device versions with PROFINET.
Star topology
1

3

4

2

4

4
A0026545

 23
1
2

3
4

Options for remote operation via PROFINET network: star topology

Automation system, e.g. Simatic S7 (Siemens)
Computer with Web browser (e.g. Internet Explorer) for accessing the integrated device Web server orcomputer with operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare, SIMATIC PDM) with COM DTM "CDI Communication
TCP/IP"
Switch, e.g. Scalance X204 (Siemens)
Measuring device

Ring topology
The device is integrated via the terminal connection for signal transmission (output 1) andthe service interface (CDI-RJ45).

72

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Operation options

1

2

3

4

4

4
A0033719

 24
1
2

3
4

Options for remote operation via PROFINET network: ring topology

Automation system, e.g. Simatic S7 (Siemens)
Computer with Web browser (e.g. Internet Explorer) for accessing the integrated device Web server orcomputer with operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare, SIMATIC PDM) with COM DTM "CDI Communication
TCP/IP"
Switch, e.g. Scalance X204 (Siemens)
Measuring device

Service interface
Via service interface (CDI-RJ45)
A point-to-point connection can be established to configure the device onsite. With the
housing open, the connection is established directly via the service interface (CDI-RJ45) of
the device.
An adapter for RJ45 and the M12 connector is optionally available:
Order code for "Accessories", option NB: "Adapter RJ45 M12 (service interface)"
The adapter connects the service interface (CDI-RJ45) to an M12 connector mounted
in the cable entry. Therefore the connection to the service interface can be established
via an M12 connector without opening the device.

1
3

2

A0027563

 25
1
2
3

Connection via service interface (CDI-RJ45)

Computer with Web browser (e.g. Microsoft Internet Explorer, Microsoft Edge) for accessing the integrated
device Web server or with "FieldCare", "DeviceCare" operating tool with COM DTM "CDI Communication TCP/IP"
Standard Ethernet connecting cable with RJ45 connector
Service interface (CDI-RJ45) of the measuring device with access to the integrated Web server

Via WLAN interface
The optional WLAN interface is available on the following device version:
Order code for "Display; operation", option G "4-line, illuminated; touch control + WLAN"
Endress+Hauser

73

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

3

1

4

5

2

6

3

4

7
A0034570

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Transmitter with integrated WLAN antenna
Transmitter with external WLAN antenna
LED lit constantly: WLAN reception is enabled on measuring device
LED flashing: WLAN connection established between operating unit and measuring device
Computer with WLAN interface and Web browser (e.g. Microsoft Internet Explorer, Microsoft Edge) foraccessing the integrated device Web server or with operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare)
Mobile handheld terminal with WLAN interface and Web browser (e.g. Microsoft Internet Explorer, Microsoft
Edge) for accessing the integrated device Web server or operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare)
Smart phone or tablet (e.g. Field Xpert SMT70)

Function

WLAN: IEEE 802.11 b/g (2.4 GHz)

Encryption

WPA2-PSK AES-128 (in accordance with IEEE 802.11i)

Configurable WLAN channels

1 to 11Degree of protection

IP67

Available antennas• Internal antenna• External antenna (optional)
In the event of poor transmission/reception conditions at the place ofinstallation.

 Only one antenna active in each case!
Range• Internal antenna: typically 10 m (32 ft)• External antenna: typically 50 m (164 ft)

Materials (external antenna)• Antenna: ASA plastic (acrylic ester-styrene-acrylonitrile) and nickelplated brass• Adapter: Stainless steel and nickel-plated brass• Cable: Polyethylene• Connector: Nickel-plated brass• Angle bracket: Stainless steel

Configuring the Internet protocol of the mobile terminal
NOTICE
If the WLAN connection is lost during the configuration, settings made may be lost.
‣ Make sure that the WLAN connection is not disconnected while configuring the device.
NOTICEIn principle, avoid simultaneous access to the measuring device via the service
interface (CDI-RJ45) and the WLAN interface from the same mobile terminal. This
could cause a network conflict.
‣ Only activate one service interface (CDI-RJ45 service interface or WLAN interface).
‣ If simultaneous communication is necessary: configure different IP address ranges, e.g.
192.168.0.1 (WLAN interface) and 192.168.1.212 (CDI-RJ45 service interface).

74

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Operation options

Preparing the mobile terminal‣ Enable WLAN reception on the mobile terminal.
Establishing a connection from the mobile terminal to the measuring device
1.

In the WLAN settings of the mobile terminal:
Select the measuring device using the SSID (e.g. EH_Promag_300_A802000).

2.

If necessary, select the WPA2 encryption method.

3.

Enter the password: serial number of the measuring device ex-works (e.g.
L100A802000).
 LED on display module flashes: it is now possible to operate the measuring device
with the Web browser, FieldCare or DeviceCare.
The serial number can be found on the nameplate.
To ensure the safe and swift assignment of the WLAN network to the measuring
point, it is advisable to change the SSID name. It should be possible to clearly assign
the new SSID name to the measuring point (e.g. tag name) because it is displayed as
the WLAN network.

Disconnecting‣ After configuring the device:
Terminate the WLAN connection between the operating unit and measuring device.

8.5.2

FieldCare

Function scope
FDT-based plant asset management tool from Endress+Hauser. It can configure all smart
field devices in a system and helps you manage them. By using the status information, it isalso a simple but effective way of checking their status and condition.
Access is via:
• CDI-RJ45 service interface →  73
• WLAN interface→  73
Typical functions:• Configuring parameters of transmitters• Loading and saving device data (upload/download)• Documentation of the measuring point• Visualization of the measured value memory (line recorder) and event logbook
For additional information about FieldCare, see Operating Instructions BA00027S
and BA00059S
Source for device description files
See information →  78
Establishing a connection

Endress+Hauser

1.

Start FieldCare and launch the project.

2.

In the network: Add a device.
 The Add device window opens.

3.

Select the CDI Communication TCP/IP option from the list and press OK to confirm.

4.

Right-click CDI Communication TCP/IP and select the Add device option in thecontext menu that opens.

75

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

5.

Select the desired device from the list and press OK to confirm.
 The CDI Communication TCP/IP (Configuration) window opens.

6.

Enter the device address in the IP address field: 192.168.1.212 and press Enter toconfirm.

7.

Establish the online connection to the device.
For additional information, see Operating Instructions BA00027S and BA00059S

User interface
2

4

3

6

5

7

Xxxxxx/…/…/

1

Device name:

Xxxxxxx

Mass flow:

12.34

kg/h

Device tag:

Xxxxxxx

Volume flow:

12.34

m³/h

Status:Good

XxxxxxAccess status tooling+
Operation
P

–

Setup
Device tag–
System unitsP
Mass flow unit
P
Volume flow unit+
Select medium
P

8

+

…

+

…

+

Maintenance

Mass flow unit:

kg/hVolume flow unit:m³/h

Xxxxxx
kg/h
m³/h

9

Advanced setup+

Diagnostics+

Expert10

11A0021051-EN

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

HeaderPicture of device
Device name
Device tag
Status area with status signal→  151
Display area for current measured values
Edit toolbar with additional functions such as save/restore, event list and create documentation
Navigation area with operating menu structure
Working area
Range of action
Status area

8.5.3

DeviceCare

Function scope
Tool to connect and configure Endress+Hauser field devices.
The fastest way to configure Endress+Hauser field devices is with the dedicated"DeviceCare" tool. Together with the device type managers (DTMs) it presents a convenient,comprehensive solution.
For details, see Innovation Brochure IN01047S

76

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Operation options

Source for device description files
See information →  78

Endress+Hauser

77

System integration

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

9

System integration

9.1

Overview of device description files

9.1.1

Current version data for the device

Firmware version

01.01.zz• On the title page of the Operating instructions• On the transmitter nameplate• Firmware version
Diagnostics → Device information → Firmware
versionRelease date of firmware version

07.2019–

Manufacturer ID

0x11

Manufacturer ID
Diagnostics → Device information → Manufacturer ID

Device ID

0x843C

Device ID
Expert → Communication → PROFINET configuration→ PROFINET information → Device ID

Device type ID

Promag 300

Device Type
Expert → Communication → PROFINET configuration→ PROFINET information → Device Type

Device revision2

Device revision
Expert → Communication → PROFINET configuration→ PROFINET information → Device revision

PROFINET version

2.3.x

–

For an overview of the different firmware versions for the device →  185

9.1.2

Operating tools

The suitable device description file for the individual operating tools is listed in the tablebelow, along with information on where the file can be acquired.
Operating tool via
Service interface (CDI)

Sources for obtaining device descriptions

FieldCare• www.endress.com → Download Area
• CD–ROM (contact Endress+Hauser)• DVD (contact Endress+Hauser)

DeviceCare• www.endress.com → Download Area
• CD–ROM (contact Endress+Hauser)• DVD (contact Endress+Hauser)

9.2

Device master file (GSD)

In order to integrate field devices into a bus system, the PROFINET system needs a
description of the device parameters, such as output data, input data, data format and data
volume.
These data are available in the device master file (GSD) which is provided to theautomation system when the communication system is commissioned. In addition device
bit maps, which appear as icons in the network structure, can also be integrated.
The device master file (GSD) is in XML format, and the file is created in the GSDML
description markup language.

78

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

9.2.1

System integration

File name of the device master file (GSD)

Example of the name of a device master file:
GSDML-V2.3.x-EH-PROMAG 300-yyyymmdd.xml

Endress+Hauser

GSDML

Description language

V2.3.x

Version of the PROFINET specification

EH

Endress+Hauser

PROMAG

Instrument family

300

Transmitteryyyymmdd

Date of issue (yyyy: year, mm: month, dd: day)

.xml

File name extension (XML file)79System integration

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

9.3

Cyclic data transmission

9.3.1

Overview of the modules

The following tables shows which modules are available to the measuring device for cyclic
data exchange. Cyclic data exchange is performed with an automation system.
Measuring device
Slot

Direction
Data flow

Analog Input module →  80

1…10, 18…20→

Digital Input module →  81

1…10

→

Diagnose Input module →  81

1…10

→

Analog Output module →  83

14, 15←

Digital Output module →  85

16, 18…20

←

11…13

←
→

17

←
→

ModuleTotalizer 1 to 3 →  82
Heartbeat Verification module →  85

9.3.2

Control system

PROFINET

Description of the modules

The data structure is described from the perspective of the automation system:• Input data: Are sent from the measuring device to the automation system.
• Output data: Are sent from the automation system to the measuring device.
Analog Input module
Transmit input variables from the measuring device to the automation system.
Analog Input modules cyclically transmit the selected input variables, along with thestatus, from the measuring device to the automation system. The input variable is depictedin the first four bytes in the form of a floating point number as per the IEEE 754 standard.
The fifth byte contains status information pertaining to the input variable.
Selection: input variable

80

Slot

Input variables

1…10• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Flow velocity• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Temperature• Electronics temperature• Noise• Coil current rise time
• Reference electrode potential against PE

18 to 20

Current input value

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

System integration

Data structure
Input data of Analog Input
Byte 1

Byte 2Byte 3

Byte 4

Measured value: floating point number (IEEE 754)
1)

Byte 5
Status 1)

Status coding →  86

Digital Input module
Transmit digital input values from the measuring device to the automation system.
Digital input values are used by the measuring device to transmit the state of device
functions to the automation system.
Digital Input modules cyclically transmit discrete input values, including the status, fromthe measuring device to the automation system. The discrete input value is depicted in thefirst byte. The second byte contains standardized status information pertaining to the
input value.
Selection: device function
Slot
1…10

Device function

Status (meaning)

Empty pipe detection• 0 (device function not active)• 1 (device function active)

Low flow cut off

Data structure
Input data of Digital Input

1)

Byte 1

Byte 2

Digital Input

Status 1)

Status coding →  86

Diagnose Input module
Transmit discrete input values (diagnostic information) from the measuring device to theautomation system.
Diagnostic information is used by the measuring device to transmit the device status to theautomation system.
Diagnose Input modules transmit discrete input values from the measuring device to theautomation system. The first two bytes contain the information regarding the diagnostic
information number (→  156). The third byte provides the status.
Selection: device function
Slot
1…10

Device function

Status (meaning)

Last diagnostics

Diagnostic information number(→  156) and status

Current diagnosis

Information about pending diagnostic information →  180.

Endress+Hauser

81

System integration

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Data structure
Input data of Diagnose Input
Byte 1

Byte 2

Diagnostic information number

Byte 3

Byte 4

StatusValue 0StatusCoding (hex)

Status0x00

No device error is present.

0x01

Failure (F):A device error is present. The measured value is no longer valid.

0x02

Function check (C):The device is in service mode (e.g. during a simulation).

0x04

Maintenance required (M):
Maintenance is required. The measured value is still valid.

0x08

Out of specification (S):The device is being operated outside its technical specification limits (e.g.
process temperature range).

Totalizer module
The Totalizer module consists of the Totalizer Value, Totalizer Control and Totalizer Modesubmodules.
Totalizer Value submodule
Transmit transmitter value from the device to the automation system.
Totalizer modules cyclically transmit a selected totalizer value, along with the status, fromthe measuring device to the automation system via the Totalizer Value submodule. The
totalizer value is depicted in the first four bytes in the form of a floating point number as
per the IEEE 754 standard. The fifth byte contains status information pertaining to thetotalizer value.
Selection: input variable
Slot

Sub-slot

11…13

1

Input variable• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow

Data structure of input data (Totalizer Value submodule)
Byte 1

Byte 2Byte 3

Byte 4

Measured value: floating point number (IEEE 754)
1)

Byte 5
Status 1)

Status coding →  86

Totalizer Control submodule
Control the totalizer via the automation system.

82

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

System integration

Selection: control totalizer
Slot

Sub-slot

11…13

2

Value

Control totalizer

0

Totalize

1

Reset + hold2

Preset + hold3

Reset + totalize

4

Preset + totalize

5

Hold

Data structure of output data (Totalizer Control submodule)
Byte 1
Control variable

Totalizer Mode submodule
Configure the totalizer via the automation system.
Selection: totalizer configuration
Slot

Sub-slot

11…13

3

Value

Control totalizer

0

Balancing

1

Balance the positive flow

2

Balance the negative flow

Data structure of output data (Totalizer Mode submodule)
Byte 1
Configuration variable

Analog Output module
Transmit compensation values from the automation system to the measuring device.
Analog Output modules cyclically transmit compensation values, along with the status andthe associated unit, from the automation system to the measuring device. The
compensation value is depicted in the first four bytes in the form of a floating point
number as per the IEEE 754 standard. The fifth byte contains standardized status
information pertaining to the compensation value. The unit is transmitted in the sixth andseventh byte.
Assigned compensation values
The configuration is performed via: Expert → Sensor → External compensation

Endress+Hauser

Slot

Compensation value

14

External density

15

External temperature

83

System integration

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Available units
Density

Temperature

Unit code

Unit

Unit code

Unit

1100

g/cm3

1001

°C

1101

g/m3

1002

°F

1099

kg/dm3

1000

K

1103

kg/l

1003

°R

1097

kg/m3

1628

SD4°C

1629

SD15°C

1630

SD20°C

32833

SG4°C

32832

SG15°C

32831

SG20°C

1107

lb/ft31108

lb/gal (us)32836

lb/bbl (us;liq.)

32835

lb/bbl (us;beer)

32837

lb/bbl (us;oil)

32834

lb/bbl (us;tank)1403

lb/gal (imp)32838

lb/bbl (imp;beer)

32839

lb/bbl (imp;oil)

Data structure
Output data of Analog Output
Byte 1

Byte 2Byte 3

Byte 4

Measured value: floating point number (IEEE 754)
1)

Byte 5
Status1)

Byte 6

Byte 7
Unit code

Status coding →  86

Failsafe mode
A failsafe mode can be defined for using the compensation values.
If the status is GOOD or UNCERTAIN, the compensation values transmitted by theautomation system are used. If the status is BAD, the failsafe mode is activated for the useof the compensation values.
Parameters are available per compensation value to define the failsafe mode: Expert→ Sensor → External compensation
Fail safe type parameter• Fail safe value option: The value defined in the Fail safe value parameter is used.
• Fallback value option: The last valid value is used.
• Off option: The failsafe mode is disabled.
Fail safe value parameter
Use this parameter to enter the compensation value which is used if the Fail safe value
option is selected in the Fail safe type parameter.
84

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

System integration

Digital Output module
Transmit digital output values from the automation system to the measuring device.
Digital output values are used by the automation system to enable and disable device
functions.
Digital output values cyclically transmit discrete output values, including the status, fromthe automation system to the measuring device. The discrete output value is transmitted
in the first byte. The second byte contains status information pertaining to the output
value.
Assigned device functions
Slot

Device function

Status (meaning)

16

Flow override• 0 (disable device function)• 1 (enable device function)

18…20

Relay output

Relay output value:• 0• 1

Data structure
Output data of Digital Output

1)
2)

Byte 1

Byte 2

Digital Output

Status 1) 2)

Status coding →  86
If the status is BAD, the control variable is not adopted.

Heartbeat Verification module
Receive discrete output values from the automation system and transmit discrete input
values from the measuring device to the automation system.
The Heartbeat Verification module receives discrete output data from the automation
system and transmits discrete input data from the measuring device to the automation
system.
The discrete output value is provided by the automation system in order to start Heartbeat
Verification. The discrete input value is depicted in the first byte. The second byte contains
status information pertaining to the input value.
The discrete input value is used by the measuring device to transmit the status of theHeartbeat Verification device functions to the automation system. The module cyclicallytransmits the discrete input value, along with the status, to the automation system. The
discrete input value is depicted in the first byte. The second byte contains status
information pertaining to the input value.
Only available with the Heartbeat Verification application package.
Assigned device functions
Slot

17

Device function

Status verification(input data)

Verification result

Endress+Hauser

Bit

Verification status

0

Verification has not been performed

1

Verification has failed2

Currently performing verification

3

Verification terminated

Bit

Verification result

85

System integration

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET(input data)

4

Verification has failed

5

Verification performed successfully

6

Verification has not been performed

7–

Verification control

Start verification(output data)

A change in the status from 0 to 1 starts the verification

Data structure
Output data of the Heartbeat Verification module
Byte 1Discrete Output

Input data of the Heartbeat Verification module

1)

Byte 1

Byte 2Discrete Input

Status 1)

Status coding →  86

9.3.3

Status coding

Status86

Coding (hex)Meaning

BAD - Maintenance alarm

0x24

A measured value is not available because a device
error has occurred.

BAD - Process related

0x28

A measured value is not available because the process
conditions are not within the device's technicalspecification limits.

BAD - Function check

0x3C

A function check is active (e.g. cleaning or calibration)

UNCERTAIN - Initial value

0x4F

A pre-defined value is output until a correct measured
value is available again or until remedial measures
have been carried out that change this status.

UNCERTAIN Maintenance demanded

0x68

Signs of wear and tear have been detected on themeasuring device. Short-term maintenance is needed
to ensure that the measuring device remains
operational.
The measured value might be invalid. The use of themeasured value depends on the application.

UNCERTAIN - Process
related

0x78

The process conditions are not within the device's
technical specification limits. This could have anegative impact on the quality and accuracy of themeasured value.
The use of the measured value depends on theapplication.

GOOD - OK

0x80

No error has been diagnosed.

GOOD - Maintenancedemanded

0xA8

The measured value is valid.
It is highly advisable to service the device in the near
future.

GOOD - Function check

0xBC

The measured value is valid.
The measuring device is performing an internalfunction check. The function check does not have any
noticeable effect on the process.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

9.3.4

System integration

Factory setting

The slots are already assigned in the automation system for initial commissioning.
Assigned slots

9.3.5

Slot

Factory setting

1

Volume flow

2

Mass flow

3

Corrected volume flow

4

Flow velocity

5…10

–

11

Totalizer 1

12

Totalizer 2

13

Totalizer 3

Startup configuration

If startup configuration is enabled, the configuration of the most important device
parameters is taken from the automation system and used. The following configuration istaken from the automation system.
Startup configuration(NSU)

Endress+Hauser• Management:• Software revision• Write protection• System units:• Mass flow
• Mass• Volume flow
• Volume• Corrected volume flow
• Corrected volume• Density• Temperature• Conductivity• Sensor adjustment• Process parameter:• Damping (flow, conductivity, temperature)• Flow override• Filter options• Low flow cut off:
• Assign process variable• Switch-on/switch-off point• Pressure shock suppression• Empty pipe detection:• Assign process variable• Limit values• Response time
• External compensation:• Temperature source• Density source• Density value• Diagnostic settings• Diagnostic behavior for diverse diagnostic information

87

System integration

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

9.4

System redundancy S2

A redundant layout with two automation systems is necessary for processes that are incontinuous operation. If one system fails the second system guarantees continued,
uninterrupted operation. The measuring device supports S2 system redundancy and cancommunicate with both automation systems simultaneously.
1

3

2

4

5

5

5
A0039509

 26
1
2
3
4
5

Example of the layout of a redundant system (S2): ring topology

Automation system 1
Synchronization of automation systems
Automation system 2
Industrial Ethernet Managed Switch
Measuring device

1

3

2

4

5

5

5
A0039178

 27
1
2
3
4
5

Example of the layout of a redundant system (S2): star topology

Automation system 1
Synchronization of automation systems
Automation system 2
Industrial Ethernet Managed Switch
Measuring device

All the devices in the network must support S2 system redundancy.

88

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Commissioning

10

Commissioning

10.1

Function check

Before commissioning the measuring device:‣ Make sure that the post-installation and post-connection checks have been performed.
• "Post-installation check" checklist→  32
• "Post-connection check" checklist →  51

10.2

Switching on the measuring device‣ After a successful function check, switch on the measuring device.
 After a successful startup, the local display switches automatically from the startup
display to the operational display.
If nothing appears on the local display or a diagnostic message is displayed, refer tothe section on "Diagnostics and troubleshooting" →  144.

10.3

Connecting via FieldCare• For FieldCare →  73 connection• For connecting via FieldCare →  75
• For the FieldCare →  76 user interface

10.4

Setting the operating language

Factory setting: English or ordered local language
XXXXXXXXX

20.50
XX
1.

XX
Main menu
Display language

0104-1EnglishOperation
Setup

2.

Display language
Ã English
DeutschEspañol
Français3.

4.

0104-1

Display language
Ã English
DeutschEspañol
Français
Hauptmenü
Sprache0104-10104-1
DeutschBetrieb
Setup
A0029420

 28

Endress+Hauser

Taking the example of the local display

89

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

10.5

Configuring the measuring device• The Setup menu with its guided wizards contains all the parameters needed for standard
operation.
• Navigation to the Setup menu
XXXXXXXXX

20.50
mA
Main menu
Display language

1.

0104-1EnglishDisplay/operat.
Setup
Main menu
Display/operat.
Setup

2.

Diagnostic/ ../Setup
Medium selection

3.

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
A0032222-EN

 29

Taking the example of the local display

The number of submenus and parameters can vary depending on the device version.
Certain submenus and parameters in these submenus are not described in the
Operation Instructions. Instead a description is provided in the Special Documentation
for the device (→ "Supplementary documentation" section).
Navigation"Setup" menu SetupName of station→  91‣ System units→  91‣ Communication→  93‣ I/O configuration→  94‣ Current input 1 to n

→  95‣ Status input 1 to n

→  96‣ Current output 1 to n

→  97‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output→  100

1 to n90

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Commissioning

10.5.1‣ Relay output 1 to n

→  106‣ Display→  108‣ Low flow cut off→  111‣ Empty pipe detection→  113‣ Advanced setup→  114

Defining the tag nameA measuring point can be quickly identified within a plant on the basis of the tag name.
The tag name is equivalent to the device name (name of station) of the PROFINET
specification (data length: 255 bytes)
The device name can be changed via DIP switches or the automation system .
The device name currently used is displayed in the Name of station parameter.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Name of station
Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Name of station

Description
Name of the measuring point.

10.5.2User interface
Max. 32 characters such as
letters and numbers.

Factory setting
EH-PROMAG300 serial
number of the device

Setting the system units

In the System units submenu the units of all the measured values can be set.
The number of submenus and parameters can vary depending on the device version.
Certain submenus and parameters in these submenus are not described in the
Operation Instructions. Instead a description is provided in the Special Documentation
for the device (→ "Supplementary documentation" section).
Navigation"Setup" menu → System units‣ System units

Endress+Hauser

Volume flow unit

→  92

Volume unit

→  92

Conductivity unit

→  92Temperature unit

→  92Mass flow unit

→  9291

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Mass unit→  92

Density unit

→  92

Corrected volume flow unit

→  93

Corrected volume unit

→  93

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Volume flow unit

Prerequisite–

Description
Select volume flow unit.

Selection

Factory setting

Unit choose list

Country-specific:• l/h• gal/min (us)ResultThe selected unit applies for:• Output• Low flow cut off• Simulation process variable
Volume unit–

Select volume unit.

Unit choose list

Country-specific:• m³• gal (us)Conductivity unit

The On option is selected in
the Conductivity
measurement parameterparameter.

Select conductivity unit.

Unit choose list

µS/cm

–

Select temperature unit.

Unit choose list

Country-specific:
• °C
• °F

Unit choose list

Country-specific:• kg/h• lb/minTemperature unit

EffectThe selected unit applies for:
Simulation process variable

ResultThe selected unit applies for:• Temperature parameter• Maximum value parameter• Minimum value parameter• External temperatureparameter• Maximum value parameter• Minimum value parameter• Fail-safe value external
temperature parameter
Mass flow unit–

Select mass flow unit.
ResultThe selected unit applies for:• Output• Low flow cut off• Simulation process variable

Mass unit–

Select mass unit.

Unit choose list

Country-specific:
• kg
• lb

Density unit–

Select density unit.

Unit choose list

Country-specific:• kg/l• lb/ft³

ResultThe selected unit applies for:• Output• Simulation process variable

92

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Parameter
Corrected volume flow unit

Commissioning

Prerequisite

Description–

Select corrected volume flow
unit.

Selection

Factory setting

Unit choose list

Country-specific:• Nl/h• Sft³/h

Unit choose list

Country-specific:• Nm³• Sft³ResultThe selected unit applies for:
Corrected volume flow
parameter (→  134)
Corrected volume unit–

Select corrected volume unit.

10.5.3

Displaying the communication interface

The Communication submenu shows all the current parameter settings for selecting andconfiguring the communication interface.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Communication‣ Communication
MAC address→  93IP address→  93Subnet mask

→  93

Default gateway→  93

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
MAC address

IP address

Description

User interface / User entry

Factory setting

Displays the MAC address of the measuring
device.

Each measuring device is given
an individual address.

 MAC = Media Access Control

Unique 12-digit character
string comprising letters andnumbers, e.g.:
00:07:05:10:01:5F

IP address of the Web server integrated in
the measuring device.

4 octet: 0 to 255 (in theparticular octet)

192.168.1.212

4 octet: 0 to 255 (in theparticular octet)

255.255.255.0

4 octet: 0 to 255 (in theparticular octet)

0.0.0.0

If the DHCP client is switched off and write
access is enabled, the IP address can also beentered.
Subnet mask

Displays the subnet mask.
If the DHCP client is switched off and write
access is enabled, the Subnet mask can also
be entered.

Default gateway

Displays the default gateway.
If the DHCP client is switched off and write
access is enabled, the Default gateway canalso be entered.

Endress+Hauser

93Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

10.5.4

Selecting and setting the medium

The Select medium wizard submenu contains parameters that must be configured inorder to select and set the medium.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Select medium‣ Medium selection
Select medium→  94Pressure compensation→  94Pressure value→  94External pressure→  94

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

Select medium–

Select medium type.

• Liquid• Gas

LiquidPressure compensation–

Select pressure compensation
type.

• Off
• Fixed value• External value

Off

Pressure value

The Fixed value option or theCurrent input 1…n option is
selected in the Pressurecompensation parameter.

Enter process pressure to be
used for pressure correction.

Positive floatingpoint number

0 barExternal pressure

The Fixed value option or theCurrent input 1…n option is
selected in the Pressurecompensation parameter.

Positive floatingpoint number

0 bar

10.5.5

Displaying the I/O configuration

The I/O configuration submenu guides the user systematically through all the parametersin which the configuration of the I/O modules is displayed.
Navigation"Setup" menu → I/O configuration‣ I/O configuration

94

I/O module 1 to n terminal numbers→  95I/O module 1 to n information→  95I/O module 1 to n type→  95Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Commissioning

Apply I/O configuration→  95I/O alteration code→  95

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface / Selection /User entry

Factory setting

I/O module 1 to n terminal numbers Shows the terminal numbers used by the I/O • Not used
module.
• 26-27 (I/O 1)• 24-25 (I/O 2)• 22-23 (I/O 3)–

I/O module 1 to n information

Shows information of the plugged I/O
module.

• Not plugged• Invalid• Not configurable• Configurable• PROFINET–

I/O module 1 to n typeShows the I/O module type.

• Off• Current output *• Current input *• Status input *• Pulse/frequency/switch
output *• Double pulse output *• Relay output *Off

Apply I/O configuration

Apply parameterization of the freely
configurable I/O module.

• No
• Yes

No

I/O alteration code

Enter the code in order to change the I/O
configuration.

Positive integer

0*

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

10.5.6

Configuring the current input

The "Current input" wizard guides the user systematically through all the parameters thathave to be set for configuring the current input.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Current input‣ Current input 1 to n

Endress+Hauser

Terminal number→  96Signal mode

→  96

0/4 mA value→  96

20 mA value→  96

Current span

→  9695

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Failure mode

→  96

Failure value→  96

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

User interface /Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

Terminal number–

Shows the terminal numbers
used by the current input
module.

• Not used
• 24-25 (I/O 2)• 22-23 (I/O 3)–

Signal mode

The measuring device is not
approved for use in thehazardous area with type ofprotection Ex-i.

Select the signal mode for thecurrent input.

• Passive• Active *Active0/4 mA value–Enter 4 mA value.

Signed floating-point
number0

20 mA value–Enter 20 mA value.

Signed floating-point
numberDepends on country
and nominal
diameterCurrent span–

Select current range forprocess value output andupper/lower level for alarm
signal.

• 4...20 mA (4...
Country-specific:
20.5 mA)• 4...20 mA NAMUR• 4...20 mA NAMUR(3.8...20.5 mA)(3.8...20.5 mA)• 4...20 mA US• 4...20 mA US(3.9...20.8 mA)(3.9...20.8 mA)• 0...20 mA (0...
20.5 mA)

Failure mode–

Define input behavior in alarm
condition.

• Alarm• Last valid value• Defined value

Alarm

Failure value

In the Failure modeparameter, the Defined value
option is selected.

Enter value to be used by thedevice if input value fromexternal device is missing.

Signed floating-point
number0*

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

10.5.7

Configuring the status input

The Status input submenu guides the user systematically through all the parameters thathave to be set for configuring the status input.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Status input‣ Status input 1 to n

96

Assign status input→  97

Terminal number→  97

Active level→  97

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Commissioning

Terminal number→  97

Response time status input→  97

Terminal number→  97

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface / Selection /User entry

Factory setting

Terminal number

Shows the terminal numbers used by thestatus input module.

• Not used
• 24-25 (I/O 2)• 22-23 (I/O 3)–

Assign status input

Select function for the status input.

• Off• Reset totalizer 1• Reset totalizer 2• Reset totalizer 3• Reset all totalizers• Flow override

Off

Active level

Define input signal level at which theassigned function is triggered.

• High• Low

HighResponse time status input

Define the minimum amount of time the
5 to 200 ms
input signal level must be present before theselected function is triggered.

10.5.850 ms

Configuring the current output

The Current output wizard guides you systematically through all the parameters that haveto be set for configuring the current output.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Current output‣ Current output 1 to n

Endress+Hauser

Terminal number→  98Signal mode

→  98Assign current output 1 to n

→  98Current span

→  980/4 mA value→  9820 mA value→  98Fixed current→  99Damping output 1 to n

→  9997

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Failure mode

→  99Failure current→  99Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

User interface /Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

Terminal number–

Shows the terminal numbers
used by the current output
module.

• Not used
• 24-25 (I/O 2)• 22-23 (I/O 3)–

Signal mode–

Select the signal mode for thecurrent output.

• Active *• Passive *ActiveAssign current output 1 to n–

Select process variable forcurrent output.

• Off *
• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Flow velocity• Conductivity *• Electronic
temperature• Referenceelectrode potential
against PE *• Coil current shot
time *• Noise *• Coating measured
value *• Test point 1• Test point 2• Test point 3

Volume flow

Current span–

Select current range forprocess value output andupper/lower level for alarm
signal.

• 4...20 mA NAMUR Country-specific:(3.8...20.5 mA)• 4...20 mA NAMUR• 4...20 mA US(3.8...20.5 mA)(3.9...20.8 mA)• 4...20 mA US• 4...20 mA (4...
(3.9...20.8 mA)
20.5 mA)• 0...20 mA (0...
20.5 mA)• Fixed current

0/4 mA value

In the Current span parameter Enter 4 mA value.
(→  98), one of thefollowing options is selected:• 4...20 mA NAMUR(3.8...20.5 mA)• 4...20 mA US (3.9...20.8
mA)• 4...20 mA (4... 20.5 mA)• 0...20 mA (0... 20.5 mA)

Signed floating-point
numberCountry-specific:• 0 l/h• 0 gal/min (us)20 mA value

One of the following options isselected in the Current spanparameter (→  98):
• 4...20 mA NAMUR(3.8...20.5 mA)• 4...20 mA US (3.9...20.8
mA)• 4...20 mA (4... 20.5 mA)• 0...20 mA (0... 20.5 mA)

Signed floating-point
numberDepends on country
and nominal
diameter98

Enter 20 mA value.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Parameter

Commissioning

Prerequisite

Description

User interface /Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

Fixed current

The Fixed current option is
selected in the Current spanparameter (→  98).

Defines the fixed output
current.

0 to 22.5 mA

22.5 mA

Damping output 1 to n

A process variable is selectedin the Assign current output
parameter (→  98) and oneof the following options isselected in the Current spanparameter (→  98):
• 4...20 mA NAMUR(3.8...20.5 mA)• 4...20 mA US (3.9...20.8
mA)• 4...20 mA (4... 20.5 mA)• 0...20 mA (0... 20.5 mA)

Set reaction time for output
signal to fluctuations in themeasured value.

0.0 to 999.9 s

1.0 s

Failure mode

A process variable is selectedin the Assign current output
parameter (→  98) and oneof the following options isselected in the Current spanparameter (→  98):
• 4...20 mA NAMUR(3.8...20.5 mA)• 4...20 mA US (3.9...20.8
mA)• 4...20 mA (4... 20.5 mA)• 0...20 mA (0... 20.5 mA)

Define output behavior inalarm condition.

• Min.
• Max.
• Last valid value• Actual value• Defined value

Max.

Failure current

The Defined value option is
selected in the Failure modeparameter.

Enter current output value inalarm condition.

0 to 22.5 mA

22.5 mA*

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

Endress+Hauser

99Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

10.5.9Configuring the pulse/frequency/switch output

The Pulse/frequency/switch output wizard guides you systematically through all theparameters that can be set for configuring the selected output type.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Pulse/frequency/switch output‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to n→  100

Operating mode

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Operating mode

Description
Define the output as a pulse, frequency orswitch output.

Selection• Pulse• Frequency• Switch

Factory setting
Pulse

Configuring the pulse output
Navigation"Setup" menu → Pulse/frequency/switch output‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to n100

Operating mode→  101

Terminal number→  101

Signal mode→  101

Assign pulse output→  101

Value per pulse→  101

Pulse width→  101

Failure mode→  101

Invert output signal→  101

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Commissioning

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Operating mode–

Define the output as a pulse,
frequency or switch output.

• Pulse• Frequency• Switch

Pulse

Terminal number–

Shows the terminal numbers
used by the PFS output
module.

• Not used
• 24-25 (I/O 2)• 22-23 (I/O 3)–

Signal mode–

Select the signal mode for the
PFS output.

• Passive• Active• Passive NAMUR

Passive

Assign pulse output 1 to n

The Pulse option is selected in
the Operating modeparameter parameter.

Select process variable forpulse output.

• Off• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow

Off

Pulse scaling

The Pulse option is selected in
the Operating modeparameter (→  100) and aprocess variable is selected in
the Assign pulse output
parameter (→  101).

Enter quantity for measured
value at which a pulse is
output.

Positive floating
point number

Depends on country
and nominal
diameter

Pulse width

The Pulse option is selected in
the Operating modeparameter (→  100) and aprocess variable is selected in
the Assign pulse output
parameter (→  101).

Define time width of theoutput pulse.

0.05 to 2 000 ms

100 msFailure mode

The Pulse option is selected in
the Operating modeparameter (→  100) and aprocess variable is selected in
the Assign pulse output
parameter (→  101).

Define output behavior inalarm condition.

• Actual value• No pulses

No pulses

Invert output signal–

Invert the output signal.

• No
• Yes

No

Configuring the frequency output
Navigation"Setup" menu → Pulse/frequency/switch output‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to nEndress+Hauser

Operating mode→  102

Terminal number→  102

Signal mode→  102

Assign frequency output→  102101

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Minimum frequency value→  102

Maximum frequency value→  103

Measuring value at minimum
frequency→  103

Measuring value at maximum
frequency→  103

Failure mode→  103

Failure frequency→  103

Invert output signal→  103

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Operating mode–

Define the output as a pulse,
frequency or switch output.

• Pulse• Frequency• Switch

Pulse

Terminal number–

Shows the terminal numbers
used by the PFS output
module.

• Not used
• 24-25 (I/O 2)• 22-23 (I/O 3)–

Signal mode–

Select the signal mode for the
PFS output.

• Passive• Active• Passive NAMUR

Passive

Assign frequency output

The Frequency option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter (→  100).

Select process variable forfrequency output.

• Off• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Flow velocity• Conductivity *• Electronic
temperature• Noise *• Coil current shot
time *• Referenceelectrode potential
against PE *• Coating measured
value *• Test point 1• Test point 2• Test point 3

Off

Minimum frequency value

The Frequency option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter (→  100)and a process variable isselected in the Assign
frequency output parameter(→  102).

Enter minimum frequency.

0.0 to 10 000.0 Hz

0.0 Hz102

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Parameter

Commissioning

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Maximum frequency value

The Frequency option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter (→  100)and a process variable isselected in the Assign
frequency output parameter(→  102).

Enter maximum frequency.

0.0 to 10 000.0 Hz

10 000.0 Hz

Measuring value at minimum
frequency

The Frequency option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter (→  100)and a process variable isselected in the Assign
frequency output parameter(→  102).

Enter measured value forminmum frequency.

Signed floating-point
numberDepends on country
and nominal
diameter

Measuring value at maximum
frequency

The Frequency option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter (→  100)and a process variable isselected in the Assign
frequency output parameter(→  102).

Enter measured value for
maximum frequency.

Signed floating-point
numberDepends on country
and nominal
diameter

Failure mode

The Frequency option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter (→  100)and a process variable isselected in the Assign
frequency output parameter(→  102).

Define output behavior inalarm condition.

• Actual value• Defined value• 0 Hz

0 Hz

Failure frequency

The Frequency option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter (→  100)and a process variable isselected in the Assign
frequency output parameter(→  102).

Enter frequency output value
in alarm condition.

0.0 to 12 500.0 Hz

0.0 HzInvert output signal–

Invert the output signal.

• No
• Yes

No

*

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

Endress+Hauser

103Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Configuring the switch output
Navigation"Setup" menu → Pulse/frequency/switch output‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to nOperating mode→  104

Terminal number→  104

Signal mode→  104

Switch output function→  105

Assign diagnostic behavior→  105

Assign limit→  105

Assign flow direction check→  105

Assign status→  105

Switch-on value→  105

Switch-off value→  105

Switch-on delay→  105

Switch-off delay→  106

Failure mode→  106

Invert output signal→  106

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Operating mode–

Define the output as a pulse,
frequency or switch output.

• Pulse• Frequency• Switch

Pulse

Terminal number–

Shows the terminal numbers
used by the PFS output
module.

• Not used
• 24-25 (I/O 2)• 22-23 (I/O 3)–

Signal mode–

Select the signal mode for the
PFS output.

• Passive• Active• Passive NAMUR

Passive

104

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Parameter

Commissioning

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Switch output function

The Switch option is selectedin the Operating modeparameter.

Select function for switch
output.

• Off• On• Diagnostic
behavior• Limit• Flow direction
check• Status

Off

Assign diagnostic behavior• In the Operating modeparameter, the Switch
option is selected.
• In the Switch output
function parameter, theDiagnostic behavior option
is selected.

Select diagnostic behavior forswitch output.

• Alarm• Alarm or warning• Warning

Alarm

Assign limit• The Switch option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter.
• The Limit option is selectedin the Switch output
function parameter.

Select process variable for limit • Off
function.
• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Flow velocity• Conductivity *• Totalizer 1• Totalizer 2• Totalizer 3• Electronic
temperature

Volume flow

Assign flow direction check• The Switch option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter.
• The Flow direction check
option is selected in the
Switch output function
parameter.

Select process variable for flow
direction monitoring.

• Off• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow

Volume flow

Assign status• The Switch option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter.
• The Status option is
selected in the Switch
output function parameter.

Select device status for switch
output.

• Empty pipe
detection• Low flow cut off• Digital output 1 *• Digital output 2 *• Digital output 3 *Empty pipe detection

Switch-on value• The Switch option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter.
• The Limit option is selectedin the Switch output
function parameter.

Enter measured value for theswitch-on point.

Signed floating-point
numberCountry-specific:• 0 l/h• 0 gal/min (us)Switch-off value• The Switch option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter.
• The Limit option is selectedin the Switch output
function parameter.

Enter measured value for theswitch-off point.

Signed floating-point
numberCountry-specific:• 0 l/h• 0 gal/min (us)Switch-on delay• The Switch option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter.
• The Limit option is selectedin the Switch output
function parameter.

Define delay for the switch-onof status output.

0.0 to 100.0 s

0.0 s

Endress+Hauser

105

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Switch-off delay• The Switch option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter.
• The Limit option is selectedin the Switch output
function parameter.

Define delay for the switch-offof status output.

0.0 to 100.0 s

0.0 s

Failure mode–

Define output behavior inalarm condition.

• Actual status• Open• Closed

Open

Invert output signal–

Invert the output signal.

• No
• Yes

No

*

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

10.5.10 Configuring the relay output
The Relay output wizard guides the user systematically through all the parameters thathave to be set for configuring the relay output.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Relay output 1 to n

‣ RelaisOutput 1 to n

106

Switch output function→  107

Assign flow direction check→  107

Assign limit→  107

Assign diagnostic behavior→  107

Assign status→  107

Switch-off value→  107

Switch-on value→  107

Failure mode→  107

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Commissioning

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Relay output function–

Select the function for therelay output.

• Closed• Open• Diagnostic
behavior• Limit• Flow direction
check• Digital Output

ClosedTerminal number–

Shows the terminal numbers
used by the relay output
module.

• Not used
• 24-25 (I/O 2)• 22-23 (I/O 3)–

Assign flow direction check

In the Relay output function
parameter, the Flow direction
check option is selected.

Select process variable for flow
direction monitoring.

• Off• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow

Volume flow

Assign limit

The Limit option is selected in
the Relay output function
parameter.

Select process variable for limit • Off
function.
• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Flow velocity• Conductivity *• Totalizer 1• Totalizer 2• Totalizer 3• Electronic
temperature

Volume flow

Assign diagnostic behavior

In the Relay output function
parameter, the Diagnostic
behavior option is selected.

Select diagnostic behavior forswitch output.

• Alarm• Alarm or warning• Warning

Alarm

Assign status

In the Relay output function
parameter, the Digital Output
option is selected.

Select device status for switch
output.

• Partially filled pipe Partially filled pipe
detection
detection• Low flow cut off• Profinet Slot 18 *• Profinet Slot 19 *• Profinet Slot 20 *Switch-off value

In the Relay output function
parameter, the Limit option is
selected.

Enter measured value for theswitch-off point.

Signed floating-point
numberCountry-specific:• 0 l/h• 0 gal(us)/min

Switch-off delay

In the Relay output function
parameter, the Limit option is
selected.

Define delay for the switch-offof status output.

0.0 to 100.0 s

0.0 s

Switch-on value

The Limit option is selected in
the Relay output function
parameter.

Enter measured value for theswitch-on point.

Signed floating-point
numberCountry-specific:• 0 l/h• 0 gal(us)/min

Switch-on delay

In the Relay output function
parameter, the Limit option is
selected.

Define delay for the switch-onof status output.

0.0 to 100.0 s

0.0 s

Failure mode–

Define output behavior inalarm condition.

• Actual status• Open• Closed

Open*

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

Endress+Hauser

107Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

10.5.11 Configuring the local display
The Display wizard guides you systematically through all the parameters that canconfigured for configuring the local display.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Display‣ Display

108

Format display→  109

Value 1 display→  109

0% bargraph value 1→  109

100% bargraph value 1→  109

Value 2 display→  110

Value 3 display→  1100% bargraph value 3→  110

100% bargraph value 3→  111

Value 4 display→  111

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Commissioning

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

Format display

A local display is provided.

Select how measured values
are shown on the display.

• 1 value, max. size
• 1 bargraph + 1value• 2 values• 1 value large + 2
values• 4 values

1 value, max. size

Value 1 display

A local display is provided.

Select the measured value thatis shown on the local display.

• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Flow velocity• Totalizer 1• Totalizer 2• Totalizer 3• Current output 1 *• Current output 2 *• Current output 3 *• Electronic
temperature• Noise *• Coil current shot
time *• Referenceelectrode potential
against PE *• Coating measured
value *• Test point 1• Test point 2• Test point 3

Volume flow

0% bargraph value 1

A local display is provided.

Enter 0% value for bar graphdisplay.

Signed floating-point
numberCountry-specific:• 0 l/h• 0 gal/min (us)100% bargraph value 1

A local display is provided.

Enter 100% value for bar
graph display.

Signed floating-point
numberDepends on country
and nominal
diameterEndress+Hauser

109

Commissioning

Parameter

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

Value 2 display

A local display is provided.

Select the measured value thatis shown on the local display.

• None• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Flow velocity• Conductivity *• Corrected
conductivity *• Totalizer 1• Totalizer 2• Totalizer 3• Current output 1 *• Current output 2 *• Current output 3 *• Current output 4 *• Temperature• Electronic
temperature• Noise *• Coil current shot
time *• Referenceelectrode potential
against PE *• Coating measured
value *• Test point 1• Test point 2• Test point 3

None

Value 3 display

A local display is provided.

Select the measured value thatis shown on the local display.

• None• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Flow velocity• Conductivity *• Corrected
conductivity *• Totalizer 1• Totalizer 2• Totalizer 3• Current output 1 *• Current output 2 *• Current output 3 *• Current output 4 *• Temperature• Electronic
temperature• Noise *• Coil current shot
time *• Referenceelectrode potential
against PE *• Coating measured
value *• Test point 1• Test point 2• Test point 3

None

0% bargraph value 3

A selection was made in the
Value 3 display parameter.

Enter 0% value for bar graphdisplay.

Signed floating-point
numberCountry-specific:• 0 l/h• 0 gal/min (us)110Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Parameter

Commissioning

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

100% bargraph value 3

A selection was made in the
Value 3 display parameter.

Enter 100% value for bar
graph display.

Signed floating-point
number0

Value 4 display

A local display is provided.

Select the measured value thatis shown on the local display.

• None• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Flow velocity• Conductivity *• Corrected
conductivity *• Totalizer 1• Totalizer 2• Totalizer 3• Current output 1 *• Current output 2 *• Current output 3 *• Current output 4 *• Temperature• Electronic
temperature• Noise *• Coil current shot
time *• Referenceelectrode potential
against PE *• Coating measured
value *• Test point 1• Test point 2• Test point 3

None

*

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

10.5.12 Configuring the low flow cut off
The Low flow cut off wizard systematically guides the user through all the parametersthat must be set to configure low flow cut off.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Low flow cut off‣ Low flow cut off

Endress+Hauser

Assign process variable→  112On value low flow cutoff→  112Off value low flow cutoff→  112Pressure shock suppression→  112111

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

Select process variable for low
flow cut off.

• Off
• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow

Volume flow

Positive floatingpoint number

Depends on country
and nominal
diameter

Assign process variable–

On value low flow cutoff

A process variable is selectedEnter on value for low flow cut
in the Assign process variable off.
parameter (→  112).

Off value low flow cutoff

A process variable is selectedEnter off value for low flow cut 0 to 100.0 %in the Assign process variable off.
parameter (→  112).

50 %Pressure shock suppression

A process variable is selectedEnter time frame for signal
in the Assign process variable suppression (= active pressure
parameter (→  112).
shock suppression).

0s

112

0 to 100 s

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Commissioning

10.5.13 Configuring empty pipe detection
The Empty pipe detection submenu contains parameters that must be configured for theconfiguration of empty pipe detection.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Empty pipe detection‣ Empty pipe detection
Empty pipe detection→  113

New adjustment→  113

Progress→  113

Switch point empty pipe detection→  113

Response time empty pipe detection→  113

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Empty pipe detection–

Switch empty pipe detection on • Off
and off.
• On

Off

New adjustment

The On option is selected in
the Empty pipe detection
parameter.

Select type of adjustment.

• Cancel• Empty pipe adjust• Full pipe adjust

CancelProgress

The On option is selected in
the Empty pipe detection
parameter.

Shows the progress.

• Ok• Busy• Not ok–

Switch point empty pipe detection

The On option is selected in
the Empty pipe detection
parameter.

Enter hysteresis in %, below
this value the measuring tube
will detected as empty.

0 to 100 %10 %Response time empty pipe detection A process variable is selectedEnter the time before
in the Assign process variable diagnostic message S862 ' Pipeparameter (→  113).
empty'' is displayed for empty
pipe detection.

0 to 100 s

1s

Endress+Hauser

113

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

10.6

Advanced settings

The Advanced setup submenu together with its submenus contains parameters for
specific settings.
Navigation to the "Advanced setup" submenu
XXXXXXXXX

20.50
mA
1.

0104-1Main menu
Display language

EnglishDisplay/operat.
Setup
Main menu
Display/operat.
Setup

2.

Diagnostic/ ../Setup
Medium selection

3.

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX/ ../Setup
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Advanced setup

4.

/ ../Advanced setup
Ent. access code5.

Device tag
Def. access code0092-1****
A0032223-EN

The number of submenus can vary depending on the device version. Some submenus
are not dealt with in the Operating Instructions. These submenus and the parameters
they contain are explained in the Special Documentation for the device.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup‣ Advanced setup

114

Enter access code→  115‣ Sensor adjustment→  115‣ Totalizer 1 to n

→  115‣ Display→  117‣ Electrode cleaning circuit→  121

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Commissioning‣ WLAN settings→  122‣ Heartbeat setup

10.6.1‣ Configuration backup→  124‣ Administration→  125

Using the parameter to enter the access code

Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup
Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Enter access code

Description

User entry

Enter access code to disable write protection of parameters.

10.6.2Max. 16-digit character string comprisingnumbers, letters and special characters

Carrying out a sensor adjustment

The Sensor adjustment submenu contains parameters that pertain to the functionality ofthe sensor.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Sensor adjustment‣ Sensor adjustment→  115

Installation direction

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Installation direction

Description
Set sign of flow direction to match thedirection of the arrow on the sensor.

10.6.3

Selection

Factory setting• Flow in arrow direction
Flow in arrow direction• Flow against arrow direction

Configuring the totalizer

In the "Totalizer 1 to n" submenu the individual totalizer can be configured.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Totalizer 1 to n

‣ Totalizer 1 to n
Assign process variable

Endress+Hauser→  116115

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Unit totalizer→  116

Totalizer operation mode→  116

Failure mode→  116

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

Selection

Assign process variable

Select process variable for totalizer.

Unit totalizer

Select the unit for the process variable of the Unit choose list
totalizer.

Country-specific:
• m³
• ft³

Totalizer operation mode

Select totalizer calculation mode.

• Net flow total• Forward flow total• Reverse flow total• Last valid value

Net flow total

Failure mode

Define the totalizer behavior in the event ofa device alarm.

• Stop• Actual value• Last valid value

Actual value

116• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Total mass flow
• Condensate mass flow
• Energy flow
• Heat flow difference

Factory setting
Volume flow

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

10.6.4

Commissioning

Carrying out additional display configurations

In the Display submenu you can set all the parameters associated with the configurationof the local display.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Display‣ Display

Endress+Hauser

Format display→  118

Value 1 display→  1180% bargraph value 1→  118

100% bargraph value 1→  118

Decimal places 1→  118

Value 2 display→  119

Decimal places 2→  119

Value 3 display→  1190% bargraph value 3→  120

100% bargraph value 3→  120

Decimal places 3→  120

Value 4 display→  120

Decimal places 4→  120

Display language→  121

Display interval→  121

Display damping→  121

Header→  121

Header text

→  121

Separator→  121

Backlight→  121117

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

Format display

A local display is provided.

Select how measured values
are shown on the display.

• 1 value, max. size
• 1 bargraph + 1value• 2 values• 1 value large + 2
values• 4 values

1 value, max. size

Value 1 display

A local display is provided.

Select the measured value thatis shown on the local display.

• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Flow velocity• Totalizer 1• Totalizer 2• Totalizer 3• Current output 1 *• Current output 2 *• Current output 3 *• Electronic
temperature• Noise *• Coil current shot
time *• Referenceelectrode potential
against PE *• Coating measured
value *• Test point 1• Test point 2• Test point 3

Volume flow

0% bargraph value 1

A local display is provided.

Enter 0% value for bar graphdisplay.

Signed floating-point
numberCountry-specific:• 0 l/h• 0 gal/min (us)100% bargraph value 1

A local display is provided.

Enter 100% value for bar
graph display.

Signed floating-point
numberDepends on country
and nominal
diameter

Decimal places 1

A measured value is specified
in the Value 1 display
parameter.

Select the number of decimal
places for the display value.

• x
• x.x
• x.xx• x.xxx• x.xxxx

x.xx

118

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Parameter

Commissioning

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

Value 2 display

A local display is provided.

Select the measured value thatis shown on the local display.

• None• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Flow velocity• Conductivity *• Corrected
conductivity *• Totalizer 1• Totalizer 2• Totalizer 3• Current output 1 *• Current output 2 *• Current output 3 *• Current output 4 *• Temperature• Electronic
temperature• Noise *• Coil current shot
time *• Referenceelectrode potential
against PE *• Coating measured
value *• Test point 1• Test point 2• Test point 3

None

Decimal places 2

A measured value is specified
in the Value 2 display
parameter.

Select the number of decimal
places for the display value.

• x
• x.x
• x.xx• x.xxx• x.xxxx

x.xx

Value 3 display

A local display is provided.

Select the measured value thatis shown on the local display.

• None• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Flow velocity• Conductivity *• Corrected
conductivity *• Totalizer 1• Totalizer 2• Totalizer 3• Current output 1 *• Current output 2 *• Current output 3 *• Current output 4 *• Temperature• Electronic
temperature• Noise *• Coil current shot
time *• Referenceelectrode potential
against PE *• Coating measured
value *• Test point 1• Test point 2• Test point 3

None

Endress+Hauser

119Commissioning

Parameter

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry

0% bargraph value 3

A selection was made in the
Value 3 display parameter.

Enter 0% value for bar graphdisplay.

Signed floating-point
numberCountry-specific:• 0 l/h• 0 gal/min (us)100% bargraph value 3

A selection was made in the
Value 3 display parameter.

Enter 100% value for bar
graph display.

Signed floating-point
number0

Decimal places 3

A measured value is specified
in the Value 3 display
parameter.

Select the number of decimal
places for the display value.

• x
• x.x
• x.xx• x.xxx• x.xxxx

x.xx

Value 4 display

A local display is provided.

Select the measured value thatis shown on the local display.

• None• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Flow velocity• Conductivity *• Corrected
conductivity *• Totalizer 1• Totalizer 2• Totalizer 3• Current output 1 *• Current output 2 *• Current output 3 *• Current output 4 *• Temperature• Electronic
temperature• Noise *• Coil current shot
time *• Referenceelectrode potential
against PE *• Coating measured
value *• Test point 1• Test point 2• Test point 3

None

Decimal places 4

A measured value is specified
in the Value 4 display
parameter.

Select the number of decimal
places for the display value.

• x
• x.x
• x.xx• x.xxx• x.xxxx

x.xx

120

Factory setting

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Commissioning

Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

Display language

A local display is provided.

Set display language.

• English• Deutsch• Français• Español• Italiano• Nederlands• Portuguesa• Polski• русский язык(Russian)• Svenska• Türkçe• 中文 (Chinese)• 日本語 (Japanese)• 한국어 (Korean)• ‫( الْعَرَبيّة‬Arabic) *• Bahasa Indonesia• ภาษาไทย (Thai) *• tiếng Việt(Vietnamese)• čeština (Czech)

English(alternatively, theordered language ispreset in the device)

Display interval

A local display is provided.

Set time measured values areshown on display if display
alternates between values.

1 to 10 s

5s

Display damping

A local display is provided.

Set display reaction time tofluctuations in the measured
value.

0.0 to 999.9 s

0.0 s

Header

A local display is provided.

Select header contents on local • Device tag
display.
• Free text

Device tag

Header text

In the Header parameter, theFree text option is selected.

Enter display header text.

Max. 12 characterssuch as letters,
numbers or special
characters (e.g. @,%, /)------------

Separator

A local display is provided.

Select decimal separator for
displaying numerical values.

• . (point)• , (comma). (point)

Backlight

One of the following
conditions is met:
• Order code for "Display;
operation", option F "4-line,
illum.; touch control"• Order code for "Display;
operation", option G "4-line,
illum.; touch control+WLAN"• Order code for "Display;
operation", option O"Separate 4-line display,illum.; 10m/30ft cable;
touch control"

Switch the local display
backlight on and off.

• Disable• Enable

Enable*Visibility depends on order options or device settings

10.6.5

Performing electrode cleaning

The Electrode cleaning circuit submenu contains parameters that must be configured forthe configuration of electrode cleaning.
The submenu is only available if the device was ordered with electrode cleaning.

Endress+Hauser

121Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Electrode cleaning circuit‣ Electrode cleaning circuit
Electrode cleaning circuit→  122

ECC duration→  122

ECC recovery time→  122

ECC cleaning cycle→  122

ECC Polarity→  122

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry / Userinterface

Electrode cleaning circuit

For the following order code:"Application package", option
EC "ECC electrode cleaning"

Enable the cyclic electrodecleaning circuit.

ECC duration

For the following order code:"Application package", option
EC "ECC electrode cleaning"

Enter the duration of electrode 0.01 to 30 s
cleaning in seconds.

2s

ECC recovery time

For the following order code:"Application package", option
EC "ECC electrode cleaning"

Define recovery time after
electrode cleaning. During thistime the current output values
will be held at last valid value.

1 to 600 s

60 s

ECC cleaning cycle

For the following order code:"Application package", option
EC "ECC electrode cleaning"

Enter the pause duration
between electrode cleaning
cycles.

0.5 to 168 h

0.5 h

ECC Polarity

For the following order code:"Application package", option
EC "ECC electrode cleaning"

Select the polarity of theelectrode cleaning circuit.

• Positive• Negative

Depends on theelectrode material:• Platinum:
Negative option• Tantalum, Alloy
C22, stainlesssteel: Positive
option10.6.6• Off• On

Factory setting

Off

WLAN configuration

The WLAN Settings submenu guides the user systematically through all the parametersthat have to be set for the WLAN configuration.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → WLAN settings‣ WLAN settings
WLAN

122

→  123

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Commissioning

WLAN mode→  123

SSID name→  123

Network security→  123

Security identification→  123

User name→  123WLAN password→  124WLAN IP address→  124WLAN MAC address→  124WLAN passphrase
WLAN MAC address
Assign SSID name→  124

SSID name→  124

Connection state→  124

Received signal strength→  124

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry / Userinterface

Factory setting

WLAN

–

Switch WLAN on and off.

• Disable• Enable

EnableWLAN mode–

Select WLAN mode.

• WLAN accesspoint• WLAN Client

WLAN access point

SSID name

The client is activated.

Enter the user-defined SSID
name (max. 32 characters).

––

Network security–

Select the security type of the
WLAN network.

• Unsecured• WPA2-PSK• EAP-PEAP withMSCHAPv2 *• EAP-PEAP
MSCHAPv2 noserver authentic. *• EAP-TLS *WPA2-PSK

Security identification–

Select security settings anddownload these settings via
menu Data management >Security > WLAN.

• Trusted issuer
certificate• Device certificate• Device private key–

User name–Enter user name.

––

Endress+Hauser

123

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry / Userinterface

Factory setting

WLAN password–

Enter WLAN password.

––

WLAN IP address–Enter IP address of the WLAN
interface of the device.

4 octet: 0 to 255 (inthe particular octet)

192.168.1.212

WLAN passphrase

The WPA2-PSK option is
selected in the Security typeparameter.

Enter the network key (8 to 32 8 to 32-digit
characters).
character string
comprising numbers,
The network key
supplied with the device letters and special
characters (without
should be changed
spaces)during commissioningSerial number of themeasuring device(e.g. L100A802000)

for security reasons.
Assign SSID name–

Select which name will be used • Device tag
for SSID: device tag or user• User-defined
defined name.

User-defined

SSID name• The User-defined option is
selected in the Assign SSID
name parameter.
• The WLAN access point
option is selected in the
WLAN mode parameter.

Enter the user-defined SSID
name (max. 32 characters).

EH_devicedesignation_last 7
digits of the serial
number (e.g.
EH_Promag_300_A
802000)Connection state–

Displays the connection status. • Connected• Not connected

Not connected

Received signal strength–

Shows the received signal
strength.

High

*



Max. 32-digit
character string
comprising numbers,
The user-defined SSID
letters and specialname may only be
assigned once. If the SSID charactersname is assigned morethan once, the devices
can interfere with one
another.

• Low• Medium• HighVisibility depends on order options or device settings

10.6.7

Configuration management

After commissioning, you can save the current device configurationor restore the previous
device configuration.
You can do so using the Configuration management parameter and the related options
found in the Configuration backup submenu.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Configuration backup‣ Configuration backup

124

Operating time→  125

Last backup→  125

Configuration management→  125

Backup state→  125Comparison result→  125

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Commissioning

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface / Selection

Factory setting

Operating time

Indicates how long the device has been in
operation.

Days (d), hours (h), minutes(m) and seconds (s)–Last backup

Shows when the last data backup was saved
to HistoROM backup.

Days (d), hours (h), minutes(m) and seconds (s)–Configuration management

Select action for managing the device data in • Cancel
the HistoROM backup.
• Execute backup• Restore *• Compare *• Clear backup data

CancelBackup stateShows the current status of data saving or
restoring.

• None• Backup in progress• Restoring in progress• Delete in progress• Compare in progress• Restoring failed• Backup failed

None

Comparison result

Comparison of current device data with
HistoROM backup.

• Settings identical• Settings not identical• No backup available• Backup settings corrupt• Check not done
• Dataset incompatible

Check not done*

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

Function scope of the "Configuration management" parameter
Options

Description

CancelNo action is executed and the user exits the parameter.

Execute backup

A backup copy of the current device configuration is saved from the HistoROM
backup to the memory of the device. The backup copy includes the transmitter dataof the device.

RestoreThe last backup copy of the device configuration is restored from the device
memory to the device's HistoROM backup. The backup copy includes thetransmitter data of the device.

CompareThe device configuration saved in the device memory is compared with the current
device configuration of the HistoROM backup.

Clear backup data

The backup copy of the device configuration is deleted from the memory of thedevice.

HistoROM backup
A HistoROM is a "non-volatile" device memory in the form of an EEPROM.
While this action is in progress, the configuration cannot be edited via the local
display and a message on the processing status appears on the display.

10.6.8Using parameters for device administration

The Administration submenu systematically guides the user through all the parametersthat can be used for device administration purposes.

Endress+Hauser

125Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Administration‣ Administration‣ Define access code→  126‣ Reset access code→  126

Device reset→  127

Using the parameter to define the access code
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Administration → Define access code

‣ Define access code
Define access code→  126

Confirm access code→  126

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User entry

Define access code

Restrict write-access to parameters to protect the configurationof the device against unintentional changes.

Max. 16-digit character string comprisingnumbers, letters and special characters

Confirm access code

Confirm the entered access code.

Max. 16-digit character string comprisingnumbers, letters and special characters

Using the parameter to reset the access code
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Administration → Reset access code

‣ Reset access code

126

Operating time→  127

Reset access code→  127

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Commissioning

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface / User entry

Factory setting

Operating time

Indicates how long the device has been in
operation.

Days (d), hours (h), minutes(m) and seconds (s)–Reset access code

Reset access code to factory settings.

Character string comprisingnumbers, letters and special
characters

0x00



For a reset code, contact yourEndress+Hauser service organization.

The reset code can only be entered via:
• Web browser• DeviceCare, FieldCare (via service
interface CDI-RJ45)• Fieldbus

Using the parameter to reset the device
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Administration
Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Device reset*

Description
Reset the device configuration - either
entirely or in part - to a defined state.

Selection• Cancel• To delivery settings• Restart device• Restore S-DAT backup *Factory setting
CancelVisibility depends on order options or device settings

10.7

Simulation

The Simulation submenu enables you to simulate, without a real flow situation, various
process variables in the process and the device alarm mode and to verify downstream
signal chains (switching valves or closed-control loops).
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Simulation‣ Simulation

Endress+Hauser

Assign simulation process variable→  128

Process variable value→  128

Status input simulation 1 to n

→  128

Input signal level 1 to n

→  128

Current input 1 to n simulation→  128

Value current input 1 to n

→  128

127

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Current output 1 to n simulation→  129

Value current output 1 to n

→  129

Frequency output simulation 1 to n

→  129

Frequency value 1 to n

→  129

Pulse output simulation 1 to n

→  129

Pulse value 1 to n

→  129

Switch output simulation 1 to n

→  129

Switch status 1 to n

→  129

Relay output 1 to n simulation→  129

Switch status 1 to n

→  129

Device alarm simulation→  129

Diagnostic event category→  129

Diagnostic event simulation→  130

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry / Userinterface

Factory setting

Assign simulation process variable–

Select a process variable forthe simulation process that is
activated.

• Off• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Flow velocity• Conductivity *Off

Process variable value

A process variable is selectedin the Assign simulation
process variable parameter(→  128).

Enter the simulation value forthe selected process variable.

Depends on theprocess variableselected0

Status input simulation 1 to n–

Switch simulation of the status • Off
input on and off.
• On

Input signal level 1 to n

In the Status input simulation Select the signal level for theparameter, the On option issimulation of the status input.
selected.

• High• Low

HighCurrent input 1 to n simulation–

Switch simulation of thecurrent input on and off.

• Off
• On

Off

Value current input 1 to n

In the Current input 1 to nsimulation parameter, the On
option is selected.

Enter the current value forsimulation.

0 to 22.5 mA

0 mA

128

Off

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Parameter

Commissioning

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry / Userinterface

Factory setting

Current output 1 to n simulation–

Switch the simulation of thecurrent output on and off.

• Off
• On

Off

Value current output 1 to n

In the Current output 1 to nsimulation parameter, the On
option is selected.

Enter the current value forsimulation.

3.59 to 22.5 mA

3.59 mA

Frequency output simulation 1 to n

In the Operating modeparameter, the Frequency
option is selected.

Switch the simulation of thefrequency output on and off.

• Off
• On

Off

Frequency value 1 to n

In the Frequency output
simulation 1 to n parameter,
the On option is selected.

Enter the frequency value forthe simulation.

0.0 to 12 500.0 Hz

0.0 HzPulse output simulation 1 to n

In the Operating modeparameter, the Pulse option is
selected.

Set and switch off the pulse
output simulation.

• Off• Fixed value• Down-counting
value

Off

For Fixed value option:
 Pulsewidth parameter(→  101) defines thepulse width of the pulses
output.

Pulse value 1 to n

In the Pulse output
simulation 1 to n parameter,
the Down-counting value
option is selected.

Enter the number of pulses for
simulation.

0 to 65 535

0

Switch output simulation 1 to n

In the Operating modeparameter, the Switch option
is selected.

Switch the simulation of theswitch output on and off.

• Off
• On

Off

Switch status 1 to n–

Select the status of the status
output for the simulation.

• Open• Closed

Open

Relay output 1 to n simulation–

Switch simulation of the relay
output on and off.

• Off
• On

Off

Switch status 1 to n

The On option is selected in
the Switch output simulation
1 to n parameter parameter.

Select status of the relay
output for the simulation.

• Open• Closed

Open

Pulse output simulation–

Set and switch off the pulse
output simulation.

• Off• Fixed value• Down-counting
value

Off

0 to 65 535

0

Fixed value option:
 For
Pulse width parameter
defines the pulse widthof the pulses output.
Pulse value

In the Pulse output
simulation parameter, theDown-counting value option
is selected.

Set and switch off the pulse
output simulation.

Device alarm simulation–

Switch the device alarm on and • Off
off.
• On

Off

Diagnostic event category–

Select a diagnostic event
category.

Process

Endress+Hauser• Sensor• Electronics• Configuration• Process129

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry / Userinterface

Diagnostic event simulation–

Select a diagnostic event tosimulate this event.

Logging interval–

Define the logging interval tlog 1.0 to 3 600.0 s
for data logging. This value
defines the time interval
between the individual data
points in the memory.

*

• Off
• Diagnostic event
picklist (depends
on the category
selected)

Factory setting

Off–

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

10.8

Protecting settings from unauthorized access

The following write protection options exist in order to protect the configuration of themeasuring device from unintentional modification:• Protect access to parameters via access code →  130• Protect access to local operation via key locking →  65
• Protect access to measuring device via write protection switch →  131• Protect access to parameters via startup configuration →  87

10.8.1

Write protection via access code

The effects of the user-specific access code are as follows:• Via local operation, the parameters for the measuring device configuration are writeprotected and their values can no longer be changed.
• Device access is protected via the Web browser, as are the parameters for the measuring
device configuration.
• Device access is protected via FieldCare or DeviceCare (via CDI-RJ45 service interface), as
are the parameters for the measuring device configuration.
Defining the access code via local display
1.

Navigate to the Define access code parameter (→  126).

2.

Define a max. 16-digit character string comprising numbers, letters and special
characters as the access code.

3.

Enter the access code again in the Confirm access code parameter (→  126) toconfirm the code.
 The -symbol appears in front of all write-protected parameters.

The device automatically locks the write-protected parameters again if a key is not pressedfor 10 minutes in the navigation and editing view. The device locks the write-protectedparameters automatically after 60 s if the user skips back to the operational display mode
from the navigation and editing view.
• If parameter write protection is activated via an access code, it can also only be
deactivated via this access code →  64.
• The user role with which the user is currently logged on via the local display→  64 is indicated by the Access status parameter. Navigation path: Operation→ Access status

130

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Commissioning

Parameters which can always be modified via the local display
Certain parameters that do not affect the measurement are excepted from parameter write
protection via the local display. Despite the user-specific access code, they can always be
modified, even if the other parameters are locked.

Language

Parameters for configuring
the local display

Parameters for configuring
the totalizer↓↓

Format display

Control Totalizer

Contrast display

Preset value

Display interval

Reset all totalizers

Defining the access code via the Web browser
1.

Navigate to the Define access code parameter (→  126).

2.

Define a max. 16-digit numeric code as an access code.

3.

Enter the access code again in the Confirm access code parameter (→  126) toconfirm the code.
 The Web browser switches to the login page.
If no action is performed for 10 minutes, the Web browser automatically returns to
the login page.
• If parameter write protection is activated via an access code, it can also only be
deactivated via this access code →  64.
• The user role with which the user is currently logged on via Web browser isindicated by the Access status parameter. Navigation path: Operation → AccessstatusResetting the access code
If you misplace the user-specific access code, it is possible to reset the code to the factory
setting. A reset code must be entered for this purpose. The user-specific access code canthen be defined again afterwards.
Via Web browser, FieldCare, DeviceCare (via CDI-RJ45 service interface), fieldbus
For a reset code, contact your Endress+Hauser service organization.
1.

Navigate to the Reset access code parameter (→  127).

2.

Enter the reset code.
 The access code has been reset to the factory setting 0000. It can be redefined→  130.

10.8.2

Write protection via write protection switch

Unlike parameter write protection via a user-specific access code, this allows write accessto the entire operating menu - except for the "Contrast display" parameter - to be locked.
The parameter values are now read only and cannot be edited any more (exception"Contrast display" parameter):• Via local display• Via PROFINET protocol

Endress+Hauser

131Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

1.
OFF ON
1
2
3
4

A0029630

Setting the write protection (WP) switch on the main electronics module to the ON
position enables hardware write protection.
 In the Locking status parameter the Hardware locked option is displayed→  133. In addition, on the local display the -symbol appears in front of theparameters in the header of the operational display and in the navigation view.

XXXXXXXXX

20.50
XX

XX
A00294252.

132

Setting the write protection (WP) switch on the main electronics module to the OFF
position (factory setting) disables hardware write protection.
 No option is displayed in the Locking status parameter →  133. On the local
display, the -symbol disappears from in front of the parameters in the headerof the operational display and in the navigation view.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Operation

11

Operation

11.1

Reading the device locking status

Device active write protection: Locking status parameter
Operation → Locking status
Function scope of the "Locking status" parameter
Options

Description

None

The access status displayed in the Access status parameter applies →  64. Only
appears on local display.

Hardware locked

The DIP switch for hardware locking is activated on the PCB board. This locks write
access to the parameters (e.g. via local display or operating tool) →  131.

Temporarily locked

Write access to the parameters is temporarily locked on account of internal
processes running in the device (e.g. data upload/download, reset etc.). Once theinternal processing has been completed, the parameters can be changed once
again.

11.2

Adjusting the operating language

Detailed information:• To configure the operating language →  89
• For information on the operating languages supported by the measuring device→  210

11.3

Configuring the display

Detailed information:• On the basic settings for the local display →  108• On the advanced settings for the local display →  117

11.4

Reading measured values

With the Measured values submenu, it is possible to read all the measured values.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values‣ Measured values

Endress+Hauser‣ Process variables→  134‣ Input values→  135‣ Output values→  137‣ Totalizer→  134

133

Operation

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

11.4.1"Process variables" submenu

The Process variables submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the current
measured values for each process variable.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Process variables‣ Process variables
Volume flow
Mass flow
Corrected volume flow
Flow velocity
Conductivity
DensityParameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Volume flow

Description
Displays the volume flow that is currently measured.

User interface
Signed floating-point number

Dependency
The unit is taken from the Volume flow unit parameter(→  92).
Mass flow

Displays the mass flow currently calculated.

Signed floating-point number

Dependency
The unit is taken from the Mass flow unit parameter(→  92).
Corrected volume flow

Displays the corrected volume flow that is currently calculated.

Signed floating-point number

Dependency
The unit is taken from the Corrected volume flow unit
parameter (→  93).
Flow velocity

Displays the flow velocity that is currently calculated.

Signed floating-point number

Conductivity

Displays the conductivity that is currently measured.

Signed floating-point number

Dependency
The unit is taken from the Conductivity unit parameter(→  92).
Density

Displays the current fixed density or density read in from anexternal device.

Signed floating-point number

Dependency
The unit is taken from the Density unit parameter.

11.4.2

Totalizer

The Totalizer submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the current
measured values for every totalizer.

134

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Operation

Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Totalizer 1 to n

‣ Totalizer 1 to n
Assign process variable→  135

Totalizer value 1 to n

→  135

Totalizer status 1 to n

→  135

Totalizer status (Hex) 1 to n

→  135

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Assign process variable–

Totalizer value 1 to n

Description

Factory setting• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Total mass flow
• Condensate massflow
• Energy flow
• Heat flow
difference

Volume flow

In the Assign process variable Displays the current totalizer
parameter one of the following counter value.
options is selected:• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Total mass flow
• Condensate mass flow
• Energy flow
• Heat flow difference

Signed floating-point
number0 m³

Totalizer status 1 to n–

Displays the current totalizer
status.

• Good• Uncertain
• Bad

–

Totalizer status (Hex) 1 to n

In Target mode parameter,
the Auto option is selected.

Displays the current statusvalue (hex) of the totalizer.

0 to 0xFF–

11.4.3

Select process variable fortotalizer.

Selection / User
entry / Userinterface"Input values" submenu

The Input values submenu guides you systematically to the individual input values.

Endress+Hauser

135

Operation

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Input values‣ Input values‣ Current input 1 to n

→  136‣ Status input 1 to n

→  136

Input values of current input
The Current input 1 to n submenu contains all the parameters needed to display thecurrent measured values for every current input.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Input values → Current input 1 to n

‣ Current input 1 to n
Measured values 1 to n

→  136

Measured current 1 to n

→  136

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface

Measured values 1 to n

Displays the current input value.

Signed floating-point number

Measured current 1 to n

Displays the current value of the current input.

0 to 22.5 mA

Input values of status input
The Status input 1 to n submenu contains all the parameters needed to display thecurrent measured values for every status input.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Input values → Status input 1 to n

‣ Status input 1 to n
→  136

Value status input

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Value status input

136

Description
Shows the current input signal level.

User interface• High• Low

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

11.4.4

Operation

Output values

The Output values submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the current
measured values for every output.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Output values‣ Output values‣ Current output 1 to n

→  137‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output→  137‣ Relay output 1 to n

→  138

1 to nOutput values of current output
The Value current output submenu contains all the parameters needed to display thecurrent measured values for every current output.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Output values → Value current output 1 to n

‣ Current output 1 to n
Output current 1 to n

→  137

Measured current 1 to n

→  137

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface

Output current 1

Displays the current value currently calculated for the current
output.

3.59 to 22.5 mA

Measured current

Displays the current value currently measured for the current
output.

0 to 30 mA

Output values for pulse/frequency/switch output
The Pulse/frequency/switch output 1 to n submenu contains all the parameters needed
to display the current measured values for every pulse/frequency/switch output.

Endress+Hauser

137

Operation

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Output values → Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to n‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to nOutput frequency 1 to n

→  138

Pulse output 1 to n

→  138

Switch status 1 to n

→  138

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

User interface

Output frequency 1 to n

In the Operating mode parameter, theFrequency option is selected.

Displays the value currently measured
for the frequency output.

Pulse output 1 to n

The Pulse option is selected in the
Displays the pulse frequency currently
Operating mode parameter parameter. output.

Positive floating-point
number

Switch status 1 to n

The Switch option is selected in the
Operating mode parameter.

• Open• Closed

0.0 to 12 500.0 Hz

Displays the current switch output
status.

Output values for relay output
The Relay output 1 to n submenu contains all the parameters needed to display thecurrent measured values for every relay output.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Output values → Relay output 1 to n

‣ Relay output 1 to n
Switch status→  138

Switch cycles→  138

Max. switch cycles number→  138

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface

Switch status

Shows the current relay switch status.

• Open• Closed

Switch cycles

Shows number of all performed switch cycles.

Positive integer

Max. switch cycles number

Shows the maximal number of guaranteed switch cycles.

Positive integer

138

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Operation

11.5

Adapting the measuring device to the process
conditions

The following are available for this purpose:• Basic settings using theSetup menu (→  90)• Advanced settings using theAdvanced setup submenu (→  114)

11.6

Performing a totalizer reset

The totalizers are reset in the Operation submenu:• Control Totalizer• Reset all totalizers
Navigation"Operation" menu → Totalizer handling‣ Totalizer handlingControl Totalizer 1 to n

→  139

Preset value 1 to n

→  139

Reset all totalizers→  139

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

Control Totalizer 1 to n

A process variable is selected
Control totalizer value.
in the Assign process variable
parameter of the Totalizer
1 to n submenu.

• Totalize• Reset + hold
• Preset + hold
• Reset + totalize• Preset + totalize• HoldPreset value 1 to n

A process variable is selected
Specify start value for totalizer. Signed floating-pointin the Assign process variable Dependency
numberparameter of the Totalizer
The unit of the selected
1 to n submenu.
process variable is
specified for the totalizer
in the Unit totalizer
parameter.

0l–

CancelTotalize

Reset all totalizers

11.6.1

Endress+Hauser

Reset all totalizers to 0 andstart.

• Cancel• Reset + totalize

Function scope of the "Control Totalizer" parameter

Options

Description

Totalize

The totalizer is started or continues running.

Reset + hold

The totaling process is stopped and the totalizer is reset to 0.

Preset + hold

The totaling process is stopped and the totalizer is set to its defined start value
from the Preset value parameter.

Reset + totalize

The totalizer is reset to 0 and the totaling process is restarted.

139

Operation

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Options

Description

Preset + totalize

The totalizer is set to the defined start value from the Preset value parameter andthe totaling process is restarted.

Hold

Totalizing is stopped.

11.6.2Function scope of the "Reset all totalizers" parameter

Options

Description

CancelNo action is executed and the user exits the parameter.

Reset + totalize

Resets all totalizers to 0 and restarts the totaling process. This deletes all the flow
values previously totalized.

11.7

Showing data logging

The Extended HistoROM application package must be enabled in the device (order
option) for the Data logging submenu to appear. This contains all the parameters for themeasured value history.
Data logging is also available via:
• Plant Asset Management Tool FieldCare →  75.
• Web browser
Function range• A total of 1000 measured values can be stored• 4 logging channels• Adjustable logging interval for data logging• Displays the measured value trend for each logging channel in the form of a chart/ ../XXXXXXXX
175.7740.69 l/h
-100s

0A0034352• x-axis: depending on the number of channels selected displays 250 to 1000 measured
values of a process variable.
• y-axis: displays the approximate measured value span and constantly adapts this to theongoing measurement.
If the length of the logging interval or the assignment of the process variables to thechannels is changed, the content of the data logging is deleted.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Data logging‣ Data logging

140

Assign channel 1→  142

Assign channel 2→  142

Assign channel 3→  142Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Operation

Assign channel 4→  142

Logging interval→  142

Clear logging data

→  142

Data logging→  142

Logging delay→  143

Data logging control→  143

Data logging status→  143

Entire logging duration→  143‣ Display channel 1‣ Display channel 2‣ Display channel 3‣ Display channel 4

Endress+Hauser

141

Operation

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry / Userinterface

Factory setting

Assign channel 1

The Extended HistoROM
application package isavailable.

Assign process variable tologging channel.

• Off• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Flow velocity• Conductivity *• Electronic
temperature• Current output 1 *• Current output 2 *• Current output 3 *• Current output 4 *• Noise *• Coil current shot
time *• Referenceelectrode potential
against PE *• Coating measured
value *• Test point 1• Test point 2• Test point 3

Off

Assign channel 2

The Extended HistoROM
application package isavailable.

Assign process variable tologging channel.

Picklist, see Assign
Offchannel 1 parameter(→  142)

Assign process variable tologging channel.

Picklist, see Assign
Offchannel 1 parameter(→  142)

Assign process variable tologging channel.

Picklist, see Assign
Offchannel 1 parameter(→  142)

software options
 The
currently enabled are
displayed in the
Software option
overview parameter.
Assign channel 3

The Extended HistoROM
application package isavailable.
software options
 The
currently enabled are
displayed in the
Software option
overview parameter.

Assign channel 4

The Extended HistoROM
application package isavailable.
software options
 The
currently enabled are
displayed in the
Software option
overview parameter.

Logging interval

The Extended HistoROM
application package isavailable.

Define the logging interval fordata logging. This value
defines the time interval
between the individual data
points in the memory.

0.1 to 3 600.0 s

1.0 s

Clear logging data

The Extended HistoROM
application package isavailable.

Clear the entire logging data.

• Cancel• Clear data

CancelData logging–

Select the data logging
method.

• Overwriting• Not overwriting

Overwriting

142

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Parameter

Operation

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry / Userinterface

Factory setting

Logging delay

In the Data logging
parameter, the Not
overwriting option is selected.

Enter the time delay formeasured value logging.

0 to 999 h

0h

Data logging control

In the Data logging
parameter, the Not
overwriting option is selected.

Start and stop measured value
logging.

• None• Delete + start• StopNone

Data logging status

In the Data logging
parameter, the Not
overwriting option is selected.

Displays the measured value
logging status.

• Done• Delay active• Active• Stopped

Done

Entire logging duration

In the Data logging
parameter, the Not
overwriting option is selected.

Displays the total logging
duration.

Positive floatingpoint number

0s*

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

Endress+Hauser

143

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

12

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

12.1

General troubleshooting

For local display
Error

Possible causes

Solution

Local display dark and no output
signals

Supply voltage does not match thevalue indicated on the nameplate.

Apply the correct supply voltage .

Local display dark and no output
signals

The polarity of the supply voltage is Correct the polarity.
wrong.

Local display dark and no output
signals

No contact between connecting
cables and terminals.

Check the connection of the cables
and correct if necessary.

Local display dark and no output
signals

Terminals are not plugged into the
I/O electronics module correctly.
Terminals are not plugged into themain electronics module correctly.

Check terminals.

Local display dark and no output
signals

I/O electronics module is defective.
Main electronics module isdefective.

Order spare part →  187.

Local display is dark, but signal
output is within the valid range

Display is set too bright or too dark. • Set the display brighter bysimultaneously pressing  + .
• Set the display darker bysimultaneously pressing  + .

Local display is dark, but signal
output is within the valid range

The cable of the display module isnot plugged in correctly.

Insert the plug correctly into themain electronics module anddisplay module.

Local display is dark, but signal
output is within the valid range

Display module is defective.

Order spare part →  187.

Backlighting of local display is red

Diagnostic event with "Alarm"
diagnostic behavior has occurred.

Take remedial measures →  156

Text on local display appears in aforeign language and cannot be
understood.

Incorrect operating language isconfigured.

1. Press  +  for 2 s ("homeposition").
2. Press .
3. Set the desired language in the
Display language parameter(→  121).

Message on local display:"Communication Error""Check Electronics"

Communication between thedisplay module and the electronics
is interrupted.

• Check the cable and theconnector between the mainelectronics module and display
module.
• Order spare part →  187.

Possible causes

Solution

For output signals
Error
Signal output outside the valid
range

144

Main electronics module isdefective.

Order spare part →  187.

Device shows correct value on local Configuration error
display, but signal output isincorrect, though in the valid range.

Check and correct the parameter
configuration.

Device measures incorrectly.

1. Check and correct parameter
configuration.
2. Observe limit values specified inthe "Technical Data".

Configuration error or device isoperated outside the application.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

For access
Error

Possible causes

Solution

No write access to parameters

Hardware write protection enabled

Set the write protection switch on
main electronics module to the OFF
position →  131.

No write access to parameters

Current user role has limited accessauthorization

1. Check user role →  64.
2. Enter correct customer-specificaccess code →  64.

No connection via PROFINETPROFINET bus cable connected
incorrectly

Check terminal assignment→  36.

No connection via PROFINET

Device plug connected incorrectly

Check the pin assignment of theconnector .

Not connecting to Web server

Web server disabled

Using the "FieldCare" or "DeviceCare"
operating tool, check whether the
Web server of the measuring device
is enabled, and enable it ifnecessary→  71.

Incorrect setting for the Ethernet
interface of the computer

1. Check the properties of theInternet protocol (TCP/IP)→  67→  67.
2. Check the network settings with
the IT manager.

• Incorrect IP address• IP address is not known

1. If addressing via hardware: open
the transmitter and check the IP
address configured (last octet).
2. Check the IP address of themeasuring device with the network
manager.
3. If the IP address is not known,
set DIP switch no. 10 to ON, restartthe device and enter the factory IP
address 192.168.1.212.

Web browser setting "Use a Proxy
Server for Your LAN" is enabled

Disable the use of the proxy serverin the Web browser settings of thecomputer.
Using the example of MS Internet
Explorer:
1. Under Control Panel open
Internet options.
2. Select the Connections tab andthen double-click LAN settings.
3. In the LAN settings disable theuse of the proxy server and selectOK to confirm.

Not connecting to Web server

Apart from the active network• Make sure that no other network
connection to the measuring device,connections are established byother network connections are also
the computer (also no WLAN)
being used.
and close other programs with
network access to the computer.
• If using a docking station for
notebooks, make sure that a
network connection to anothernetwork is not active.
Not connecting to Web serverEndress+Hauser

Incorrect WLAN access data

• Check WLAN network status.
• Log on to the device again using
WLAN access data.
• Verify that WLAN is enabled on
the measuring device andoperating device →  67.

WLAN communication disabled–145

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Error

Possible causes

Solution

Not connecting to Web server,
FieldCare or DeviceCare

No WLAN network available• Check if WLAN reception ispresent: LED on display module
is lit blue
• Check if WLAN connection isenabled: LED on display module
flashes blue
• Switch on instrument function.

Network connection not present or
unstable

WLAN network is weak.

• Operating device is outside ofreception range: Check network
status on operating device.
• To improve network
performance, use an external
WLAN antenna.

Parallel WLAN and Ethernet
communication• Check network settings.
• Temporarily enable only the
WLAN as an interface.

Data transfer active

Wait until data transfer or current
action is finished.

Connection lost

1. Check cable connection andpower supply.
2. Refresh the Web browser andrestart if necessary.

Not using optimum version of Web
server.

1. Use the correct Web browser
version →  66.
2. Clear the Web browser cache andrestart the Web browser.

Unsuitable view settings.

Change the font size/display ratioof the Web browser.

No or incomplete display ofcontents in the Web browser• JavaScript not enabled• JavaScript cannot be enabled

1. Enable JavaScript.
2. Enter http://XXX.XXX.X.XXX/
basic.html as the IP address.

Operation with FieldCare or
DeviceCare via CDI-RJ45 service
interface (port 8000)

Firewall of computer or network ispreventing communication

Depending on the settings of thefirewall used on the computer or in
the network, the firewall must be
adapted or disabled to allow
FieldCare/DeviceCare access.

Flashing of firmware with FieldCare Firewall of computer or network isor DeviceCare via CDI-RJ45 service
preventing communicationinterface (via port 8000 or TFTP
ports)

Depending on the settings of thefirewall used on the computer or in
the network, the firewall must be
adapted or disabled to allow
FieldCare/DeviceCare access.

Web browser frozen and operation
no longer possible

Content of Web browser
incomplete or difficult to read

For system integration
Error

Possible causes

The device name is not displayedcorrectly and contains coding.

A device name containing one ormore underscores has been
specified via the automation
system.

Solution
Specify a correct device name(without underscores) via theautomation system.

12.2

Diagnostic information via light emitting diodes

12.2.1

Transmitter

Different LEDs in the transmitter provide information on the device status.

146

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

1 2 3 4 5A0029629

1
2
3
4
5

Supply voltage
Device status
Flashing/network status
Port 1 active: PROFINETPort 2 active: PROFINET and service interface (CDI)

LED
1

2

2

3

Supply voltage

Device status (normal
operation)

Device status (during
start-up)

Color

Meaning

Off

Supply voltage is off or too low.

Green

Supply voltage is ok.

Off

Firmware error.

Green

Device status is ok.

Flashing green

Device is not configured.

Flashing red

A diagnostic event with "Warning" diagnostic
behavior has occurred.

Red

A diagnostic event with "Alarm" diagnostic behavior
has occurred.

Flashing red/green

The device restarts.

Flashes red slowly

If > 30 seconds: problem with the boot loader.

Flashes red quickly

If > 30 seconds: compatibility problem whenreading the firmware.

Flashing/network status Green
Flashing green

Cyclic data exchange is active.
Following request from automation system:
Flash frequency: 1 Hz (flash functionality: 500 ms
on, 500 ms off)
Cyclic data exchange is not active, no IP address isavailable:
Flash frequency: 3 Hz

45Endress+Hauser

Port 1 active:
PROFINETPort 2 active:
PROFINET andservice interface (CDI)Red

IP address is available but there is no connection to
the automation system

Flashing red

Cyclic data exchange was active but the connection
was disconnected:
Flash frequency: 3 HzOff

Not connected or no connection established.

White

Connected and connection established.

Flashing white

Communication not active.

Off

Not connected or no connection established.

Yellow

Connected and connection established.

Flashing yellow

Communication not active.

147

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

12.3

Diagnostic information on local display

12.3.1

Diagnostic message

Faults detected by the self-monitoring system of the measuring device are displayed as adiagnostic message in alternation with the operational display.
Operational display in alarm condition

Diagnostic message

2 1

XXXXXXXXX

S

20.50

S801

3
4

Supply voltage

XX

X

S

XXXXXXXXX

i

Menu

5
A0029426-EN

1
2
3
4
5

Status signal
Diagnostic behavior
Diagnostic behavior with diagnostic code
Short text
Operating elements

If two or more diagnostic events are pending simultaneously, only the message of thediagnostic event with the highest priority is shown.
Other diagnostic events that have occurred can be displayed in the Diagnostics menu:• Via parameter →  180• Via submenus →  180
Status signals
The status signals provide information on the state and reliability of the device by
categorizing the cause of the diagnostic information (diagnostic event).
The status signals are categorized according to VDI/VDE 2650 and NAMUR
Recommendation NE 107: F = Failure, C = Function Check, S = Out of Specification, M= Maintenance Required
SymbolMeaning
FailureA device error has occurred. The measured value is no longer valid.
Function check
The device is in service mode (e.g. during a simulation).
Out of specification
The device is operated:
Outside its technical specification limits (e.g. outside the process temperature range)
Maintenance required
Maintenance is required. The measured value remains valid.

148

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnostic behavior
SymbolMeaning
Alarm• Measurement is interrupted.
• Signal outputs and totalizers assume the defined alarm condition.
• A diagnostic message is generated.
Warning
Measurement is resumed. The signal outputs and totalizers are not affected. A diagnostic
message is generated.

Diagnostic information
The fault can be identified using the diagnostic information. The short text helps you byproviding information about the fault. In addition, the corresponding symbol for the
diagnostic behavior is displayed in front of the diagnostic information on the local display.
Operating elements
Key

MeaningPlus key
In a menu, submenu
Opens the message about remedy information.
Enter key
In a menu, submenu
Opens the operating menu.

Endress+Hauser

149

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

12.3.2

Calling up remedial measuresS

XXXXXXXXX

20.50

S801
Supply voltage
i

XX

X

S

XXXXXXXXX

Menu

1.

1

Diagnostic list
Diagnostics 1

S

S801 Supply voltage

Diagnostics 2
Diagnostics 3
2.
2
4
6

Supply voltage(ID:203)
S801 0d00h02m25s
Increase supply voltage

35

3.
A0029431-EN 30

Message about remedial measures

1
2
3
4
5
6

Diagnostic information
Short text
Service ID
Diagnostic behavior with diagnostic code
Operation time of occurrence
Remedial measures

1.

The user is in the diagnostic message.
Press  ( symbol).
 The Diagnostic list submenu opens.

2.

Select the desired diagnostic event with  or  and press  .
 The message about the remedial measures opens.

3.

Press  +  simultaneously.
 The message about the remedial measures closes.

The user is in the Diagnostics menu at an entry for a diagnostics event, e.g. in the
Diagnostic list submenu or Previous diagnostics parameter.
1.

Press .
 The message for the remedial measures for the selected diagnostic event opens.

2.

Press  +  simultaneously.
 The message for the remedial measures closes.

12.4

Diagnostic information in the Web browser

12.4.1

Diagnostic options

Any faults detected by the measuring device are displayed in the Web browser on thehome page once the user has logged on.

150

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

1

2

3
A0031056

1
2
3

Status area with status signal
Diagnostic information
Remedy information with Service ID

In addition, diagnostic events which have occurred can be shown in the Diagnostics
menu:• Via parameter →  180• Via submenu →  180
Status signals
The status signals provide information on the state and reliability of the device by
categorizing the cause of the diagnostic information (diagnostic event).
SymbolMeaning
FailureA device error has occurred. The measured value is no longer valid.
Function check
The device is in service mode (e.g. during a simulation).
Out of specification
The device is operated:
Outside its technical specification limits (e.g. outside the process temperature range)
Maintenance required
Maintenance is required. The measured value is still valid.

The status signals are categorized in accordance with VDI/VDE 2650 and NAMUR
Recommendation NE 107.

12.4.2

Calling up remedy information

Remedy information is provided for every diagnostic event to ensure that problems can berectified quickly. These measures are displayed in red along with the diagnostic event andthe related diagnostic information.

12.5

Diagnostic information in FieldCare or DeviceCare

12.5.1

Diagnostic options

Any faults detected by the measuring device are displayed on the home page of theoperating tool once the connection has been established.
Endress+Hauser

151

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

1
Xxxxxx/…/…/
Device name: Xxxxxxx

Mass flow:

12.34

kg/h

Device tag:

Volume flow:

12.34

m³/h

Xxxxxxx

Status signal:

XxxxxxDiagnostics 1:

P

Function check (C)C485 Simu...

P

Remedy information:

Deactivate...

P

Access status tooling:

Mainenance+Operation

+

Setup

+

Diagnostics+

ExpertFailure (F)2Function check (C)Diagnostics 1:

C485 Simulation measured vari...

Remedy information:

Deactivate Simulation (Service...

3

Out of spezification (S)Maintenance required (M)A0021799-EN

1
2
3

Status area with status signal→  148
Diagnostic information→  149
Remedy information with Service ID

In addition, diagnostic events which have occurred can be shown in the Diagnostics
menu:• Via parameter →  180• Via submenu →  180
Diagnostic information
The fault can be identified using the diagnostic information. The short text helps you byproviding information about the fault. In addition, the corresponding symbol for the
diagnostic behavior is displayed in front of the diagnostic information on the local display.

12.5.2

Calling up remedy information

Remedy information is provided for every diagnostic event to ensure that problems can berectified quickly:• On the home page
Remedy information is displayed in a separate field below the diagnostics information.
• In the Diagnostics menu
Remedy information can be called up in the working area of the user interface.
The user is in the Diagnostics menu.

152

1.

Call up the desired parameter.

2.

On the right in the working area, mouse over the parameter.
 A tool tip with remedy information for the diagnostic event appears.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

12.6

Adapting the diagnostic information

12.6.1

Adapting the diagnostic behavior

Each item of diagnostic information is assigned a specific diagnostic behavior at thefactory. The user can change this assignment for specific diagnostic information in the
Diagnostic behavior submenu.
Expert → System → Diagnostic handling → Diagnostic behavior
Available diagnostic behaviors
The following diagnostic behaviors can be assigned:
Diagnostic behavior

Description

Alarm

The device stops measurement. The totalizers assume the defined alarm
condition. A diagnostic message is generated.

Warning

The device continues to measure. The measured value output via PROFINET
and the totalizers are not affected. A diagnostic message is generated.

Logbook entry only

The device continues to measure. The diagnostic message is displayed only in
the Event logbook submenu (Event list submenu) and not in alternation withthe operational display.

Off

The diagnostic event is ignored, and no diagnostic message is generated orentered.

Displaying the measured value status
If modules with input data (e.g. Analog Input module, Discrete Input module, Totalizer
module, Heartbeat module) are configured for cyclic data transmission, the measured
value status is coded as per PROFIBUS PA Profile 3.02 Specification and transmitted alongwith the measured value to the PROFINET Controller via the status byte. The status byte is
split into three segments: Quality, Quality Substatus and Limits.

Measuring value

Coding(hex)
Byte 5

Quality

Quality Substatus

Limits
A0032228-EN

 31

Structure of the status byte

The content of the status byte depends on the configured failsafe mode in the particularfunction block. Depending on which failsafe mode has been configured, status informationin accordance with PROFIBUS PA Profile Specification 3.02 is transmitted to the the
PROFINET controller via the status byte. The two bits for the limits always have the value
0.

Endress+Hauser

153

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Supported status information
StatusCoding (hex)

BAD - Maintenance alarm

0x24

BAD - Process related

0x28

BAD - Function check

0x3C

UNCERTAIN - Initial value

0x4F

UNCERTAIN - Maintenance demanded

0x68

UNCERTAIN - Process related

0x78

GOOD - OK

0x80

GOOD - Maintenance demanded

0xA8

GOOD - Function check

0xBC

Determining the measured value status and device status via the diagnostic behavior
When the diagnostic behavior is assigned, this also changes the measured value status anddevice status for the diagnostic information. The measured value status and device statusdepend on the choice of diagnostic behavior and on the group in which the diagnostic
information is located.
The diagnostic information is grouped as follows:• Diagnostic information pertaining to the sensor: diagnostic number 000 to 199→  154• Diagnostic information pertaining to the electronics: diagnostic number 200 to 399→  154• Diagnostic information pertaining to the configuration: diagnostic number 400 to 599→  155• Diagnostic information pertaining to the process: diagnostic number 800 to 999→  155
Depending on the group in which the diagnostic information is located, the following
measured value status and device status are firmly assigned to the particular diagnostic
behavior:
Diagnostic information pertaining to the sensor: diagnostic number 000 to 199
Measured value status (fixed assignment)

Diagnostic behavior(configurable)

Quality

Quality
Substatus

Coding(hex)

Category(NE107)

Alarm

BAD

Maintenance
alarm

0x24

F
(Failure)

Maintenancealarm

Warning

GOOD

Maintenancedemanded

0xA8

M(Maintenance)

Maintenancedemanded

GOOD

ok

0x80

–

–

Logbook entry only
Off

Device diagnosis(fixed assignment)

Diagnostic information pertaining to the electronics: diagnostic number 200 to 399
Diagnostic number 200 to 301, 303 to 399
Diagnostic behavior(configurable)
Alarm
Warning154

Measured value status (fixed assignment)
Quality

Quality
Substatus

Coding(hex)

Category(NE107)BAD

Maintenance
alarm

0x24

F
(Failure)

Device diagnosis(fixed assignment)
Maintenancealarm

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnostic behavior(configurable)
Logbook entry onlyOff

Measured value status (fixed assignment)
Quality

Quality
Substatus

Coding(hex)

Category(NE107)GOOD

ok0x80 to 0x8E–

Device diagnosis(fixed assignment)–

Diagnostic information 302
Measured value status (fixed assignment)

Diagnostic behavior(configurable)

Quality

Quality
Substatus

Coding(hex)

Category(NE107)

Device diagnosis(fixed assignment)

Alarm

BAD

Function check,
local override

0x24

C

Function check

Warning

GOOD

Function check

0xBC to 0xBF––

Diagnostic information 302 (device verification active) is output during internal orexternal Heartbeat verification.
• Signal status: Function check• Choice of diagnostic behavior: alarm or warning (factory setting)
When Heartbeat verification starts, data logging is interrupted, the last valid measured
value is output and the totalizers are stopped.
Diagnostic information pertaining to the configuration: diagnostic number 400 to 599
Measured value status (fixed assignment)

Diagnostic behavior(configurable)

Quality

Quality
Substatus

Coding(hex)

Category(NE107)

Alarm

BAD

Process
related

0x28

F(Failure)

Invalid process
condition

Warning

UNCERTA
IN

Process
related

0x78

S(Out ofspecification)

Invalid process
condition

GOOD

ok

0x80

–

–

Logbook entry only
Off

Device diagnosis(fixed assignment)

Diagnostic information pertaining to the process: diagnostic number 800 to 999

Quality

Quality
Substatus

Coding(hex)

Category(NE107)

Alarm

BAD

Process
related

0x28

F(Failure)

Invalid process
condition

Warning

UNCERTA
IN

Process
related

0x78

S(Out ofspecification)

Invalid process
condition

GOOD

ok

0x80

–

–

Logbook entry only
Off

Endress+Hauser

Measured value status (fixed assignment)

Diagnostic behavior(configurable)

Device diagnosis(fixed assignment)

155

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

12.7

Overview of diagnostic information

The amount of diagnostic information and the number of measured variables affected
increase if the measuring device has one or more application packages.
In the case of some items of diagnostic information, the diagnostic behavior can bechanged. Change the diagnostic information →  153

12.7.1

Diagnostic of sensor

Diagnostic information
No.

Measured variable status [from the factory]
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Warning

1)

1. Check sensor cable and sensor
2. Execute Heartbeat Verification
3. Replace sensor cable or sensor• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Density• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Status• Volume flow

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

082 Data storage

1. Check module connections
2. Contact service

Measured variable status

156

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

043 Sensor short circuit

1)

Remedy instructions

Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Status• Volume flow

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Diagnostic information
No.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

083 Memory content
Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

1. Restart device
2. Restore HistoROM S-DAT backup('Device reset' parameter)
3. Replace HistoROM S-DAT• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Status• Volume flow

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

168 Coating detected

Clean measuring tube–

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

M

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

1. Check grounding conditions
2. Deactivate conductivity measurement• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Status• Volume flow

Short text

169 Conductivity measurement failed
Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

M

Diagnostic behavior

WarningEndress+Hauser

157

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnostic information
No.

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Check ambient and process temperature• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Density• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Status• Volume flow

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

170 Coil resistance
Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Short text

180 Temperature sensor defective

1. Check sensor connections
2. Replace sensor cable or sensor
3. Turn off temperature measurement

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

Measured variable status

158

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

1. Check sensor cable and sensor
2. Execute Heartbeat Verification
3. Replace sensor cable or sensor• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Density• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Status• Volume flow

Short text

181 Sensor connection

Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Density• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Status• Volume flow

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

12.7.2

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnostic of electronic

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

201 Device failure

1. Restart device
2. Contact service

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

242 Software incompatible

1. Check software
2. Flash or change main electronics
moduleMeasured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Endress+Hauser• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Status• Volume flow

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Status• Volume flow

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

1. Check electronic modules
2. Check if correct modules are available(e.g. NEx, Ex)
3. Replace electronic modules• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Short text

252 Modules incompatible

Influenced measured
variables

159

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

252 Modules incompatible

1. Check if correct electronic modul isplugged
2. Replace electronic module

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

262 Sensor electronic connection faulty
Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

1. Check or replace connection cablebetween sensor electronic module(ISEM) and main electronics
2. Check or replace ISEM or mainelectronics

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Status• Volume flow

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Status• Volume flow

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Change main electronic module• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Status• Volume flow

Short text

270 Main electronic failure

160

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Diagnostic information
No.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Remedy instructions

Short text

271 Main electronic failure

1. Restart device
2. Change main electronic module

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

272 Main electronic failure

1. Restart device
2. Contact service

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

273 Main electronic failure

Change electronic

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Endress+Hauser

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Status• Volume flow

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Status• Volume flow

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Status• Volume flow

161

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnostic information
No.

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Remedy instructions

Short text

275 I/O module 1 to n defective

Change I/O module

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Short text

276 I/O module 1 to n faulty

1. Restart device
2. Change I/O module

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

283 Memory content

1. Reset device
2. Contact service

Measured variable status

162

Remedy instructions

Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Status• Volume flow

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

302 Device verification active

Device verification active, please wait.

Measured variable status [from the factory]

1)

Influenced measured
variables

1)

QualityGood

Quality substatus

Function check

Coding (hex)0xBC to 0xBF

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

Warning• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Status• Volume flow

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

303 I/O 1 to n configuration changed
Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

M

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

1. Apply I/O module configuration(parameter 'Apply I/O configuration')
2. Afterwards reload device description
and check wiring

Remedy instructions

Short text

311 Electronic failure

1. Do not reset device
2. Contact service

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

M

Diagnostic behavior

WarningEndress+Hauser–

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Status• Volume flow

163

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

332 Writing in HistoROM backup failed
Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Replace user interface board
Ex d/XP: replace transmitter

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Status• Volume flow

Influenced measured
variables

1. Restart device
2. Check electronic modules
3. Change I/O Modul or main electronics• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Status• Volume flow

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

372 Sensor electronic (ISEM) faulty

Influenced measured
variables

Remedy instructions

Short text

361 I/O module 1 to n faulty

164

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

1. Restart device
2. Check if failure recurs
3. Replace sensor electronic module(ISEM)• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Status• Volume flow

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Diagnostic information
No.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

1. Transfer data or reset device
2. Contact service• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Status• Volume flow

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

1. Restart device
2. Check if failure recurs
3. Replace module rack inclusive electronic
modules• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Status• Volume flow

Short text

373 Sensor electronic (ISEM) faulty
Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Short text

375 I/O- 1 to n communication failed
Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Endress+Hauser

165

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

376 Sensor electronic (ISEM) faulty
Measured variable status [from the factory]

1)

QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Warning

1)

1. Replace sensor electronic module(ISEM)
2. Turn off diagnostic message• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Status• Volume flow

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

1. Activate empty pipe detection
2. Check partial filled pipe and installation
direction
3. Check sensor cabling
4. Deactivate diagnostic 377• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Density• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Status• Volume flow

Short text

377 Sensor electronic (ISEM) faulty
Measured variable status [from the factory]

1)

Influenced measured
variables

QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Warning1)

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

378 Supply voltage ISEM faulty

Check supply voltage to the ISEM–

Measured variable status

166

QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Diagnostic information
No.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Remedy instructions

Short text

382 Data storage

1. Insert T-DAT
2. Replace T-DAT

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Influenced measured
variables

1. Restart device
2. Delete T-DAT via 'Reset device'
parameter
3. Replace T-DAT• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Status• Volume flow

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

387 HistoROM data faulty

Contact service organization

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Endress+Hauser• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Status• Volume flow

Remedy instructions

Short text

383 Memory content

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Status• Volume flow

167

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

512 Sensor electronic (ISEM) faulty

1. Check ECC recovery time
2. Turn off ECC

Measured variable status
Quality

Uncertain

Quality substatus

Maintenance demanded

Coding (hex)

0x68 to 0x6B

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

12.7.3330 Flash file invalid

1. Update firmware of device
2. Restart device

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

M

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information

Remedy instructions

Short text

331 Firmware update failed

1. Update firmware of device
2. Restart device

Measured variable status

168

Remedy instructions

Short textNo.

• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Density• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Status• Volume flow

Diagnostic of configuration

Diagnostic information
No.

Influenced measured
variables

Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Warning

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Diagnostic information
No.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

410 Data transfer

1. Check connection
2. Retry data transfer

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Status• Volume flow

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

412 Processing download

Download active, please wait

Measured variable status
Quality

Uncertain

Quality substatus

Initial value

Coding (hex)0x4C to 0x4F

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Density• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Status• Volume flow

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

431 Trim 1 to n

Carry out trim–

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

WarningEndress+Hauser

169

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnostic information
No.

1. Restart device
2. Contact service

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Status• Volume flow

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

1. Check data set file
2. Check device configuration
3. Up- and download new configuration• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Status• Volume flow

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

438 Dataset
Measured variable status
Quality

Uncertain

Quality substatus

Maintenance demanded

Coding (hex)

0x68 to 0x6B

Status signal

M

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

Short text

441 Current output 1 to n
Measured variable status [from the factory] 1)

170

Remedy instructions

Short text

437 Configuration incompatible

1)

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Warning

1. Check process
2. Check current output settings–

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

442 Frequency output 1 to n
Measured variable status [from the factory]

1)

QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Warning

1)

No.

–

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

442 Frequency output 1 to n

1. Check process
2. Check frequency output settings

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

–

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

443 Pulse output 1 to n
Measured variable status [from the factory]
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Warning

1)

1. Check process
2. Check pulse output settings–

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

444 Current input 1 to n
Measured variable status [from the factory] 1)

1)

1. Check process
2. Check frequency output settings

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Diagnostic information

1)

Influenced measured
variables

QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Warning

1. Check process
2. Check current input settings

Influenced measured
variables• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Endress+Hauser

171

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnostic information
No.

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Remedy instructions

Short text

453 Flow override

Deactivate flow override

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Function check

Coding (hex)0xBC to 0xBF

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

484 Failure mode simulation

Deactivate simulation

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Function check

Coding (hex)0x3C to 0x3F

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Short text

485 Measured variable simulation

Deactivate simulation

Measured variable status

172

Remedy instructions

QualityGood

Quality substatus

Function check

Coding (hex)0xBC to 0xBF

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

Warning

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Density• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Status• Volume flow

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Density• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Status• Volume flow

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Density• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Status• Volume flow

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Diagnostic information
No.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

486 Current input 1 to n simulation

Deactivate simulation

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Function check

Coding (hex)0xBC to 0xBF

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic informationNo.

• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

491 Current output 1 to n simulation

Deactivate simulation–

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

492 Simulation frequency output 1 to n

Deactivate simulation frequency output–

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

493 Simulation pulse output 1 to n

Deactivate simulation pulse output–

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

WarningEndress+Hauser

173

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnostic information
No.

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

494 Switch output simulation 1 to n

Deactivate simulation switch output–

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

495 Diagnostic event simulation

Deactivate simulation–

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

496 Status input simulation

Deactivate simulation status input–

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

Short text

511 ISEM settings faulty
Measured variable status

174

Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

1. Check measuring period and integration • Conductivity
time• Corrected conductivity
2. Check sensor properties• Density• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Status• Volume flow

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

520 I/O 1 to n hardware configuration invalid

1. Check I/O hardware configuration
2. Replace wrong I/O module
3. Plug the module of double pulse output
on correct slot

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

–

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

530 Electrode cleaning is running

Turn off ECC

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Function check

Coding (hex)0xBC to 0xBF

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Density• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Status• Volume flow

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

531 Empty pipe adjustment faulty

Execute EPD adjustment

Measured variable status [from the factory]

1)

Influenced measured
variables

QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Warning1)• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Corrected volume flow
• Status• Volume flow

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

537 Configuration

1. Check IP addresses in network
2. Change IP address

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

WarningEndress+Hauser–

175

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

594 Relay output simulation

Deactivate simulation switch output–

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

Warning

12.7.4

Diagnostic of process

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

803 Current loop

1. Check wiring
2. Change I/O module

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

832 Electronic temperature too highMeasured variable status [from the factory]

1)

176

Influenced measured
variables

QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Warning

Reduce ambient temperature
1)–

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Status• Volume flow

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

833 Electronic temperature too low

Increase ambient temperature

Measured variable status [from the factory]

1)

QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Warning1)

No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

834 Process temperature too highReduce process temperature

Measured variable status [from the factory]
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Warning

1)

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Status• Volume flow

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

835 Process temperature too low

Increase process temperature

Measured variable status [from the factory]

1)• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Status• Volume flow

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Diagnostic information

1)

Influenced measured
variables

QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Warning

1)

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Status• Volume flow

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Endress+Hauser

177

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

842 Process limit
Measured variable status [from the factory]

1)

1)

Quality

Uncertain

Quality substatus

Process related

Coding (hex)0x78 to 0x7B

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Warning

No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

882 Input signal

1. Check input configuration
2. Check external device or process
conditions

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Measured variable status [from the factory]
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Warning

1)

Influenced measured
variables• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Status• Volume flow

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

1. Eliminate external magnetic field nearsensor
2. Turn off diagnostic message• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Density• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Status• Volume flow

Short text

937 Sensor symmetry178• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Status• Volume flow

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Diagnostic information

1)

Low flow cut off active!
1. Check low flow cut off configuration

Influenced measured
variables

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

938 EMC interference
Measured variable status [from the factory]

1)

QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

1)

No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

961 Electrode potential out of specification
Measured variable status [from the factory] 1)
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Warning

1. Check process conditions
2. Check ambient conditions

Influenced measured
variables• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Status• Volume flow

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

962 Pipe empty
Measured variable status [from the factory]

1)• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Density• Electronic temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Status• Volume flow

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Diagnostic information

1)

1. Check ambient conditions regarding
EMC influence
2. Turn off diagnostic message

Influenced measured
variables

QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Warning

1)

1. Perform full pipe adjustment
2. Perform empty pipe adjustment
3. Turn off empty pipe detection

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Coil current shot time
• Reference electrodepotential against PE• Noise• Corrected volume flow
• Status• Volume flow

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Endress+Hauser

179

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

12.8

Pending diagnostic events

The Diagnostics menu allows the user to view the current diagnostic event and theprevious diagnostic event separately.
To call up the measures to rectify a diagnostic event:• Via local display →  150• Via Web browser →  151• Via "FieldCare" operating tool →  152• Via "DeviceCare" operating tool →  152
Other pending diagnostic events can be displayed in the Diagnostic list submenu→  180
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu

 Diagnostics
Actual diagnostics→  180

Previous diagnostics→  180

Operating time from restart→  180

Operating time→  180

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Actual diagnostics

Prerequisite
A diagnostic event has occurred.

Description

User interface

Shows the current occured diagnostic
event along with its diagnostic
information.

Symbol for diagnostic
behavior, diagnostic codeand short message.

two or more messages occur
 Ifsimultaneously,
the message withthe highest priority is shown on
the display.
Previous diagnostics

Two diagnostic events have alreadyoccurred.

Shows the diagnostic event that
occurred prior to the current diagnostic
event along with its diagnostic
information.

Symbol for diagnostic
behavior, diagnostic codeand short message.

Operating time from restart–Shows the time the device has been in
operation since the last device restart.

Days (d), hours (h),minutes (m) and seconds(s)Operating time–

Indicates how long the device has beenin operation.

Days (d), hours (h),minutes (m) and seconds
(s)

12.9

Diagnostic list

Up to 5 currently pending diagnostic events can be displayed in the Diagnostic list
submenu along with the associated diagnostic information. If more than 5 diagnostic
events are pending, the events with the highest priority are shown on the display.
Navigation path
Diagnostics → Diagnostic list
180

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Diagnostics and troubleshooting/ ../Diagnose list
Diagnostics
F273 Main electronic
Diagnostics 2
Diagnostics 3
A0014006-EN

 32

Taking the example of the local display

To call up the measures to rectify a diagnostic event:• Via local display →  150• Via Web browser →  151• Via "FieldCare" operating tool →  152• Via "DeviceCare" operating tool →  152

12.10 Event logbook
12.10.1 Reading out the event logbook
A chronological overview of the event messages that have occurred is provided in the
Events list submenu.
Navigation path
Diagnostics menu → Event logbook submenu → Event list
/ ../Eventlist
F
I1091 Config. change
I1157 Mem.err. ev.list
0d01h19m10s
F311 Electr. failure
A0014008-EN

 33

Taking the example of the local display• A maximum of 20 event messages can be displayed in chronological order.
• If the Extended HistoROM application package (order option) is enabled in the device,
the event list can contain up to 100 entries .
The event history includes entries for:• Diagnostic events →  156• Information events →  182
In addition to the operation time of its occurrence, each event is also assigned a symbolthat indicates whether the event has occurred or is ended:• Diagnostic event• : Occurrence of the event• : End of the event• Information event
: Occurrence of the event
To call up the measures to rectify a diagnostic event:• Via local display →  150• Via Web browser →  151• Via "FieldCare" operating tool →  152• Via "DeviceCare" operating tool →  152
For filtering the displayed event messages →  182

Endress+Hauser

181

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

12.10.2 Filtering the event logbook
Using the Filter options parameter you can define which category of event message isdisplayed in the Events list submenu.
Navigation path
Diagnostics → Event logbook → Filter options
Filter categories• All• Failure (F)• Function check (C)• Out of specification (S)• Maintenance required (M)• Information (I)12.10.3 Overview of information events
Unlike a diagnostic event, an information event is displayed in the event logbook only andnot in the diagnostic list.
Info number

182

Info name

I1000--------(Device ok)

I1079

Sensor changed

I1089

Power on

I1090

Configuration reset

I1091

Configuration changed

I1092

HistoROM backup deleted

I1137

Electronic changed

I1151

History reset

I1155

Reset electronic temperature

I1156

Memory error trend

I1157

Memory error event list

I1256

Display: access status changed

I1278

I/O module restarted

I1335

Firmware changed

I1351

Empty pipe detection adjustment failure

I1353

Empty pipe detection adjustment ok

I1361

Web server: login failed

I1397

Fieldbus: access status changed

I1398

CDI: access status changed

I1443

Coating thickness not determined

I1444

Device verification passed

I1445

Device verification failed

I1457

Measurement error verification failed

I1459

I/O module verification failed

I1461

Sensor verification failed

I1462

Sensor electronic module verific. failed

I1512

Download started

I1513

Download finished

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Info number

Info name

I1514

Upload started

I1515

Upload finishedI1618

I/O module 2 replaced

I1619

I/O module 3 replaced

I1621

I/O module 4 replaced

I1622

Calibration changed

I1624

Reset all totalizers

I1625

Write protection activated

I1626

Write protection deactivatedI1627

Web server: login successful

I1628

Display: login successful

I1629

CDI: login successful

I1631

Web server access changed

I1632

Display: login failed

I1633

CDI: login failed

I1634

Reset to factory settings

I1635

Reset to delivery settings

I1639

Max. switch cycles number reached

I1649

Hardware write protection activated

I1650

Hardware write protection deactivated

I1712

New flash file received

I1725

Sensor electronic module (ISEM) changed

I1726

Configuration backup failed

12.11 Resetting the measuring device
Using theDevice reset parameter (→  127) it is possible to reset the entire device
configuration or some of the configuration to a defined state.

12.11.1 Function scope of the "Device reset" parameter
Options

Description

CancelNo action is executed and the user exits the parameter.

To delivery settings

Every parameter for which a customer-specific default setting was ordered is resetto this customer-specific value. All other parameters are reset to the factory
setting.

Restart device

The restart resets every parameter whose data are in the volatile memory (RAM)to the factory setting (e.g. measured value data). The device configuration remains
unchanged.

Restore S-DAT backup

Restore the data that are saved on the S-DAT. The data record is restored from theelectronics memory to the S-DAT.

 This option is displayed only in an alarm condition.

Endress+Hauser

183

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

12.12 Device information
The Device information submenu contains all parameters that display different
information for device identification.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Device information‣ Device information
Device tag→  184

Serial number→  184

Firmware version→  184

Device name→  184

Manufacturer
Order code→  184

Extended order code 1→  185

Extended order code 2→  185

Extended order code 3→  185

ENP version→  185

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface

Factory setting

Device tag

Shows name of measuring point.

Max. 32 characters such as
lower-case letters or numbers.

PromagSerial number

Shows the serial number of the measuring
device.

Max. 11-digit character string
comprising letters andnumbers.

–

Firmware version

Shows the device firmware version installed.

Character string in the format
xx.yy.zz–

Device nameShows the name of the transmitter.

Promag 300/500–

Character string composed ofletters, numbers and certain
punctuation marks (e.g. /).

–name can be found on the The
nameplate of the transmitter.
Order code

Shows the device order code.
order code can be found on the The
nameplate of the sensor andtransmitter in the "Order code" field.

184

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Parameter
Extended order code 1

Description

User interface

Shows the 1st part of the extended ordercode.

Factory setting

Character string–

Character string–

Character string–

Character string

2.02.00

extended order code can also be Thefound on the nameplate of the sensor
and transmitter in the "Ext. ord. cd."
field.
Extended order code 2

Shows the 2nd part of the extended order
code.
extended order code can also be Thefound on the nameplate of the sensor
and transmitter in the "Ext. ord. cd."
field.

Extended order code 3

Shows the 3rd part of the extended order
code.
extended order code can also be Thefound on the nameplate of the sensor
and transmitter in the "Ext. ord. cd."
field.

ENP version

Shows the version of the electronic
nameplate (ENP).

12.13 Firmware history
Releasedate

Firmwareversion

Order codefor"Firmwareversion"FirmwarechangesDocumentation
type

Documentation

09.2019 01.01.zz

Option 65

System redundancy S2 Operating
Instructions

BA01719D/06/EN/04.19

10.2017 01.00.zz

Option 71

Original firmware

BA01719D/06/EN/01.17

OperatingInstructions

It is possible to flash the firmware to the current version using the service interface.
For the compatibility of the firmware version with the installed device description files
and operating tools, observe the information about the device in the "Manufacturer's
information" document.
The manufacturer's information is available:• In the Download Area of the Endress+Hauser web site: www.endress.com →Downloads• Specify the following details:• Product root: e.g. 5P3B
The product root is the first part of the order code: see the nameplate on thedevice.
• Text search: Manufacturer's information• Media type: Documentation – Technical Documentation

Endress+Hauser

185

Maintenance

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

13

Maintenance

13.1

Maintenance tasks

No special maintenance work is required.

13.1.1

Exterior cleaning

When cleaning the exterior of measuring devices, always use cleaning agents that do notattack the surface of the housing or the seals.

13.1.2

Interior cleaning

No interior cleaning is planned for the device.

13.1.3Replacing seals

The sensor's seals (particularly aseptic molded seals) must be replaced periodically.
The interval between changes depends on the frequency of the cleaning cycles, thecleaning temperature and the medium temperature.
Replacement seals (accessory part) →  217

13.2

Measuring and test equipment

Endress+Hauser offers a wide variety of measuring and test equipment, such as W@M or
device tests.
Your Endress+Hauser Sales Center can provide detailed information on the services.
List of some of the measuring and testing equipment: →  189

13.3

Endress+Hauser services

Endress+Hauser offers a wide variety of services for maintenance such as recalibration,
maintenance service or device tests.
Your Endress+Hauser Sales Center can provide detailed information on the services.

186

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Repair14

Repair

14.1

General notes

14.1.1

Repair and conversion concept

The Endress+Hauser repair and conversion concept provides for the following:• The measuring devices have a modular design.
• Spare parts are grouped into logical kits with the associated Installation Instructions.
• Repairs are carried out by Endress+Hauser Service or by appropriately trained customers.
• Certified devices can only be converted to other certified devices by Endress+Hauser
Service or at the factory.

14.1.2

Notes for repair and conversion

For repair and modification of a measuring device, observe the following notes:‣ Use only original Endress+Hauser spare parts.
‣ Carry out the repair according to the Installation Instructions.
‣ Observe the applicable standards, federal/national regulations, Ex documentation (XA)
and certificates.

‣ Document every repair and each conversion and enter them into the W@M life cycle
management database.

14.2

Spare parts

Measuring device serial number:
Can be read out via the Serial number parameter (→  184) in the Device
information submenu.

14.3

Endress+Hauser services

Endress+Hauser offers a wide range of services.
Your Endress+Hauser Sales Center can provide detailed information on the services.

14.4

ReturnThe requirements for safe device return can vary depending on the device type andnational legislation.
1.

Refer to the website for more information:
http://www.endress.com/support/return-material

2.

Return the device if repairs or a factory calibration are required, or if the wrong
device was ordered or delivered.

14.5

Disposal

14.5.1

Removing the measuring device

1.

Endress+Hauser

Switch off the device.

187

Repair

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINETLWARNING
Danger to persons from process conditions.
‣ Beware of hazardous process conditions such as pressure in the measuring device, hightemperatures or aggressive fluids.
2.

Carry out the mounting and connection steps from the "Mounting the measuring
device" and "Connecting the measuring device" sections in reverse order. Observe thesafety instructions.

14.5.2

Disposing of the measuring device

LWARNING
Danger to personnel and environment from fluids that are hazardous to health.
‣ Ensure that the measuring device and all cavities are free of fluid residues that arehazardous to health or the environment, e.g. substances that have permeated into
crevices or diffused through plastic.
Observe the following notes during disposal:‣ Observe valid federal/national regulations.
‣ Ensure proper separation and reuse of the device components.

188

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

15

Accessories

Accessories

Various accessories, which can be ordered with the device or subsequently from Endress+Hauser, are available for the device. Detailed information on the order code in question isavailable from your local Endress+Hauser sales center or on the product page of theEndress+Hauser website: www.endress.com.

15.1

Device-specific accessories

15.1.1For the transmitter

Accessories

Description

Proline 300 transmitter

Transmitter for replacement or storage. Use the order code to define the following
specifications:• Approvals• Output• Input• Display/operation• Housing• Software Order code: 5X3BXX
 Installation Instructions EA01263D
Remote display andoperating module
DKX001• If ordered directly with the measuring device:
Order code for "Display; operation", option O "Remote display 4-line illum.;10 m (30 ft) Cable; touch control"• If ordered separately:• Measuring device: order code for "Display; operation", option M "W/o, preparedfor remote display"• DKX001: Via the separate product structure DKX001• If ordered subsequently:
DKX001: Via the separate product structure DKX001
Mounting bracket for DKX001• If ordered directly: order code for "Accessory enclosed", option RA "Mounting
bracket, pipe 1"/2""• If ordered subsequently: order number: 71340960
Connecting cable (replacement cable)
Via the separate product structure: DKX002

 Further information on display and operating module DKX001→  211.
 Special Documentation SD01763D
External WLAN antenna

External WLAN antenna with 1.5 m (59.1 in) connecting cable and two angle
brackets. Order code for "Accessory enclosed", option P8 "Wireless antenna widearea".
The external WLAN antenna is not suitable for use in hygienic • applications.
• Further information on the WLAN interface →  73.

 Order number: 71351317
 Installation Instructions EA01238D
Protective cover

Is used to protect the measuring device from the effects of the weather: e.g.
rainwater, excess heating from direct sunlight.

 Order number: 71343505
 Installation Instructions EA01160D
Ground cableEndress+Hauser

Set, consisting of two ground cables for potential equalization.

189

Accessories

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

15.1.2For the sensor

Accessories

Description

Ground disks

Are used to ground the medium in lined measuring tubes to ensure proper
measurement.

 For details, see Installation Instructions EA00070D
15.2

Communication-specific accessories

Accessories

Description

Field Xpert SFX350

Field Xpert SFX350 is a mobile computer for commissioning and maintenance. It
enables efficient device configuration and diagnostics for and can be used in nonhazardous areas.

 Operating Instructions BA01202S
Field Xpert SFX370

Field Xpert SFX370 is a mobile computer for commissioning and maintenance. It
enables efficient device configuration and diagnostics for and can be used in the
non-hazardous area and in the hazardous area.

 Operating Instructions BA01202S
Field Xpert SMT70

The Field Xpert SMT70 tablet PC for device configuration enables mobile plant
asset management in hazardous and non-hazardous areas. It is suitable forcommissioning and maintenance staff to manage field instruments with a digitalcommunication interface and to record progress.
This tablet PC is designed as an all-in-one solution with a preinstalled driver libraryand is an easy-to-use, touch-sensitive tool which can be used to manage field
instruments throughout their entire life cycle.
Technical Information TI01342S
 •• Operating
Instructions BA01709S• Product page: www.endress.com/smt70

15.3Service-specific accessories

Accessories

Description

Applicator

Software for selecting and sizing Endress+Hauser measuring devices:• Choice of measuring devices for industrial requirements• Calculation of all the necessary data for identifying the optimum flowmeter:
e.g. nominal diameter, pressure loss, flow velocity and accuracy.
• Graphic illustration of the calculation results• Determination of the partial order code, administration, documentation andaccess to all project-related data and parameters over the entire life cycle ofa project.
Applicator is available:• Via the Internet: https://portal.endress.com/webapp/applicator• As a downloadable DVD for local PC installation.

W@M

190

W@M Life Cycle Management
Improved productivity with information at your fingertips. Data relevant to aplant and its components is generated from the first stages of planning andduring the asset’s complete life cycle.
W@M Life Cycle Management is an open and flexible information platform
with online and on-site tools. Instant access for your staff to current, in-depth
data shortens your plant’s engineering time, speeds up procurement processes
and increases plant uptime.
Combined with the right services, W@M Life Cycle Management boosts
productivity in every phase. For more information, visit
www.endress.com/lifecyclemanagement

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Accessories

Accessories

Description

FieldCare

FDT-based plant asset management tool from Endress+Hauser.
It can configure all smart field units in your system and helps you manage
them. By using the status information, it is also a simple but effective way ofchecking their status and condition.

 Operating Instructions BA00027S and BA00059S
DeviceCare

Tool to connect and configure Endress+Hauser field devices.

 Innovation brochure IN01047S
15.4

System components

Accessories

Description

Memograph M graphic
data manager

The Memograph M graphic data manager provides information on all the relevantmeasured variables. Measured values are recorded correctly, limit values aremonitored and measuring points analyzed. The data are stored in the 256 MB
internal memory and also on a SD card or USB stick.
Information TI00133R
 •• Technical
Operating Instructions BA00247R

Endress+Hauser

191

Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

16

Technical data

16.1

Application

The measuring device is only suitable for flow measurement of liquids with a minimum
conductivity of 5 µS/cm.
Depending on the version ordered, the measuring device can also measure potentiallyexplosive, flammable, poisonous and oxidizing media.
To ensure that the device remains in proper operating condition for its service life, use themeasuring device only for media against which the process-wetted materials are
sufficiently resistant.

16.2

Function and system design

Measuring principle

Electromagnetic flow measurement on the basis of Faraday's law of magnetic induction.

Measuring system

The device consists of a transmitter and a sensor.
The device is available as a compact version:
The transmitter and sensor form a mechanical unit.
For information on the structure of the device →  14

16.3
Measured variable

Input

Direct measured variables• Volume flow (proportional to induced voltage)• Electrical conductivity
Calculated measured variables• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow

Measuring range

Typically v = 0.01 to 10 m/s (0.03 to 33 ft/s) with the specified accuracy
Flow characteristic values in SI units: DN 15 to 125 (½ to 4")
Nominal diameter

192

Recommended
flow

Factory settingsmin./max. fullscale value(v ~0.3/10 m/s)

Full scale value
current output(v ~ 2.5 m/s)

Pulse value(~ 2 pulse/s)

Low flow cut off(v ~ 0.04 m/s)

[mm]

[in]

[dm3/min][dm3/min][dm3][dm3/min]15½

4 to 100

25

0.2

0.5

25

1

9 to 300

75

0.5

1

32

–

15 to 500

125

1

2

40

1½

25 to 700

200

1.5

3

50

2

35 to 1 100

300

2.5

5

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINETTechnical data

Recommendedflow

Nominal diameter

Factory settingsmin./max. fullscale value(v ~0.3/10 m/s)

Full scale value
current output(v ~ 2.5 m/s)

Pulse value(~ 2 pulse/s)

Low flow cut off(v ~ 0.04 m/s)

[mm]

[in]

[dm3/min][dm3/min][dm3][dm3/min]65–

60 to 2 000

500

5

8

80

3

90 to 3 000

750

5

12

100

4

145 to 4 700

1200

10

20

125

–

220 to 7 500

1850

15

30

Flow characteristic values in SI units: DN 150 to 600 (6 to 24")
Nominal diameter

Recommended
flow

Factory settingsmin./max. fullscale value(v ~ 0.3/10 m/s)

Full scale value
current output(v ~ 2.5 m/s)

Pulse value(~ 2 pulse/s)

Low flow cut off(v ~ 0.04 m/s)

[mm]

[in]

[m3/h][m3/h][m3][m3/h]

150

6

20 to 600

150

0.03

2.5

200

8

35 to 1 100

300

0.05

5

250

10

55 to 1 700

500

0.05

7.5

300

12

80 to 2 400

750

0.1

10

350

14

110 to 3 300

1 000

0.1

15

400

16

140 to 4 200

1 200

0.15

20

450

18

180 to 5 400

1 500

0.25

25

500

20

220 to 6 600

2 000

0.25

30

600

24

310 to 9 600

2 500

0.3

40

Flow characteristic values in US units: ½ - 24" (DN 15 - 600)
Nominal diameter

Endress+Hauser

Recommended
flow

Factory settingsmin./max. fullscale value(v ~ 0.3/10 m/s)

Full scale value
current output(v ~ 2.5 m/s)

Pulse value(~ 2 pulse/s)

Low flow cut off(v ~ 0.04 m/s)

[in]

[mm]

[gal/min][gal/min][gal][gal/min]½

15

1.0 to 27

6

0.1

0.15

1

25

2.5 to 80

18

0.2

0.25

1½

40

7 to 190

50

0.5

0.75

2

50

10 to 300

75

0.5

1.25

3

80

24 to 800

200

2

2.5

4

100

40 to 1 250

300

2

4

6

150

90 to 2 650

600

5

12

8

200

155 to 4 850

1200

10

15

10

250

250 to 7 500

1500

15

30

12

300

350 to 10 600

2400

25

45

14

350

500 to 15 000

3600

30

60

193

Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Recommendedflow

Nominal diameter

Factory settingsmin./max. fullscale value(v ~ 0.3/10 m/s)

Full scale value
current output(v ~ 2.5 m/s)

Pulse value(~ 2 pulse/s)

Low flow cut off(v ~ 0.04 m/s)

[in]

[mm]

[gal/min][gal/min][gal][gal/min]16

400

600 to 19 000

4800

50

60

18

450

800 to 24 000

6000

50

90

20

500

1 000 to 30 000

7500

75

120

24

600

1 400 to 44 000

10500

100

180

Recommended measuring range
Flow limit →  206

Operable flow range

Over 1000 : 1

Input signal

External measured values
To increase the accuracy of certain measured variables or to calculate the mass flow, theautomation system can continuously write different measured values to the measuring
device:• Medium temperature to increase the accuracy of the electrical conductivity (e.g. iTEMP)• Reference density for calculating the mass flow
Various pressure transmitters and temperature measuring devices can be orderedfrom Endress+Hauser: see "Accessories" section →  191
It is recommended to read in external measured values to calculate the corrected volume
flow.
Current input
The measured values are written from the automation system to the measuring device via
the current input →  194.
Digital communication
The measured values are written from the automation system to the measuring device via
PROFINET.
Current input 0/4 to 20 mA

194

Current input

0/4 to 20 mA (active/passive)

Current span

• 4 to 20 mA (active)• 0/4 to 20 mA (passive)

Resolution

1 µA

Voltage drop

Typically: 0.6 to 2 V for 3.6 to 22 mA (passive)

Maximum input voltage≤ 30 V (passive)

Open-circuit voltage≤ 28.8 V (active)

Possible input variables• Pressure• Temperature• Density•

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINETTechnical data

Status input

Endress+Hauser

Maximum input values• DC –3 to 30 V
• If status input is active (ON): Ri >3 kΩ

Response time

Configurable: 5 to 200 ms

Input signal level• Low signal: DC –3 to +5 V
• High signal: DC 12 to 30 V

Assignable functions• Off• Reset the individual totalizers separately• Reset all totalizers• Flow override

195

Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

16.4
Output signal

OutputPROFINET
Standards

In accordance with IEEE 802.3

Current output 4 to 20 mA
Signal mode

Can be set to:• Active• Passive

Current range

Can be set to:• 4 to 20 mA NAMUR• 4 to 20 mA US• 4 to 20 mA• 0 to 20 mA (only with signal mode active)• Fixed current value

Maximum output values

22.5 mA

Open-circuit voltage

DC 28.8 V (active)

Maximum input voltage

DC 30 V (passive)

Load

0 to 700 Ω

Resolution

0.38 µA

Damping

Configurable: 0 to 999 s

Assignable measured
variables• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Flow velocity• Conductivity• Electronics temperature

Pulse/frequency/switch output
FunctionCan be set to pulse, frequency or switch output

VersionOpen collector
Can be set to:• Active• Passive• Passive NAMUR Ex-i, passive
Maximum input values

DC 30 V, 250 mA (passive)

Open-circuit voltage

DC 28.8 V (active)

Voltage drop

For 22.5 mA: ≤ DC 2 V

Pulse output

196

Maximum input values

DC 30 V, 250 mA (passive)

Maximum output current

22.5 mA (active)

Open-circuit voltage

DC 28.8 V (active)

Pulse width

Configurable: 0.05 to 2 000 ms

Maximum pulse rate

10 000 Impulse/s

Pulse value

Adjustable

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Assignable measured
variables

Technical data

• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow

Frequency output
Maximum input values

DC 30 V, 250 mA (passive)

Maximum output current

22.5 mA (active)

Open-circuit voltage

DC 28.8 V (active)

Output frequency

Adjustable: end value frequency 2 to 10 000 Hz (f max = 12 500 Hz)

Damping

Configurable: 0 to 999 s

Pulse/pause ratio

1:1

Assignable measured
variables• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Flow velocity• Conductivity• Electronics temperature

Switch output
Maximum input values

DC 30 V, 250 mA (passive)

Open-circuit voltage

DC 28.8 V (active)

Switching behavior

Binary, conductive or non-conductive

Switching delay

Configurable: 0 to 100 s

Number of switchingcyclesUnlimited

Assignable functions

• Off
• On
• Diagnostic behavior• Limit value:• Off• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Flow velocity• Conductivity• Totalizer 1-3• Electronics temperature• Flow direction monitoring• Status• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off

Relay output

Endress+Hauser

Function

Switch output

Version

Relay output, galvanically isolated

Switching behavior

Can be set to:• NO (normally open), factory setting• NC (normally closed)

197

Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Maximum switchingcapacity (passive)• DC 30 V, 0.1 A• AC 30 V, 0.5 A

Assignable functions

• Off
• On
• Diagnostic behavior• Limit value:• Off• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Flow velocity• Conductivity• Totalizer 1-3• Electronic temperature• Flow direction monitoring• Status• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off

User-configurable input/output
One specific input or output is assigned to a user-configurable input/output (configurableI/O) during device commissioning.
The following inputs and outputs are available for assignment:• Choice of current output: 4 to 20 mA (active), 0/4 to 20 mA (passive)• Pulse/frequency/switch output• Choice of current input: 4 to 20 mA (active), 0/4 to 20 mA (passive)• Status input
Signal on alarm

Depending on the interface, failure information is displayed as follows:
PROFINET
Device diagnostics

According to "Application Layer protocol for decentralized periphery", Version 2.3

Current output 0/4 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
Failure mode

Choose from:• 4 to 20 mA in accordance with NAMUR recommendation NE 43• 4 to 20 mA in accordance with US• Min. value: 3.59 mA• Max. value: 22.5 mA• Freely definable value between: 3.59 to 22.5 mA• Actual value• Last valid value

0 to 20 mA
Failure mode

198

Choose from:• Maximum alarm: 22 mA• Freely definable value between: 0 to 20.5 mA

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINETTechnical data

Pulse/frequency/switch output
Pulse output
Failure mode

Choose from:• Actual value• No pulses

Frequency output
Failure mode

Choose from:• Actual value• 0 Hz• Defined value (f max 2 to 12 500 Hz)

Switch output
Failure mode

Choose from:• Current status• Open• Closed

Relay output
Failure mode

Choose from:• Current status• Open• Closed

Local display
Plain text display

With information on cause and remedial measures

Backlight

Red backlighting indicates a device error.

Status signal as per NAMUR recommendation NE 107
Interface/protocol• Via digital communication:
PROFINET• Via service interface• CDI-RJ45 service interface• WLAN interface
Plain text display

With information on cause and remedial measures

Web browser
Plain text display

Endress+HauserWith information on cause and remedial measures

199

Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINETLight emitting diodes (LED)
Status information

Status indicated by various light emitting diodes
The following information is displayed depending on the device version:• Supply voltage active• Data transmission active• Device alarm/error has occurred• PROFINET network available• PROFINET connection established• PROFINET blinking feature Diagnostic information via light emitting diodes →  146
Low flow cut off

The switch points for low flow cut off are user-selectable.

Galvanic isolation

The outputs are galvanically isolated from one another and from earth (PE).

Protocol-specific data

ProtocolApplication layer protocol for decentral device periphery and distributed
automation, Version 2.3

Communication type

100 MBit/s

Conformity class

Conformance Class B

Netload Class

Netload Class II

Baud rates

Automatic 100 Mbit/s with full-duplex detection

Cycle times

From 8 ms

Polarity

Auto-polarity for automatic correction of crossed TxD and RxD pairs

Media Redundancy Protocol
(MRP)

Yes

System redundancy support

System redundancy S2 (2 AR with 1 NAP)

Device profile

Application interface identifier 0xF600
Generic device

Manufacturer ID

0x11

Device type ID

0x843C

Device description files (GSD,
DTM, DD)

Information and files under:• www.endress.com
On the product page for the device: Documents/Software → Device drivers• www.profibus.org

Supported connections• 2 x AR (IO Controller AR)• 1 x AR (IO-Supervisor Device AR connection allowed)• 1 x Input CR (Communication Relation)• 1 x Output CR (Communication Relation)• 1 x Alarm CR (Communication Relation)

Configuration options formeasuring device• DIP switches on the electronics module, for device name assignment (lastpart)• Manufacturer-specific software (FieldCare, DeviceCare)• Web browser• Device master file (GSD), can be read out via the integrated Web server ofthe measuring device

Configuration of thedevice name

• DIP switches on the electronics module, for device name assignment (lastpart)• DCP protocol• Process Device Manager (PDM)• Integrated Web server

200

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINETTechnical data

Supported functions• Identification & Maintenance
Simple device identification via:
• Control system• Nameplate• Measured value status
The process variables are communicated with a measured value status• Blinking feature via the onsite display for simple device identification andassignment• Device operation via operating tools (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare, SIMATIC
PDM)

System integration

Information on system integration →  80 .
• Cyclic data transmission• Overview and description of the modules• Status coding• Startup configuration• Factory setting

16.5

Power supply

Terminal assignment→  36

Device plugs available→  36

Pin assignment, device plug→  36

Supply voltage

Order code for"Power supply"

Terminal voltage

Option D

DC24 V±20%–

Option E

AC100 to 240 V–15…+10%50/60 Hz, ±4 Hz

DC24 V±20%–

AC100 to 240 V–15…+10%50/60 Hz, ±4 Hz

Option I

Power consumption

Frequency range

TransmitterMax. 10 W (active power)switch-on current

Current consumption

Max. 36 A (<5 ms) as per NAMUR Recommendation NE 21

Transmitter• Max. 400 mA (24 V)• Max. 200 mA (110 V, 50/60 Hz; 230 V, 50/60 Hz)

Power supply failure• Totalizers stop at the last value measured.
• Depending on the device version, the configuration is retained in the device memoryor in
the pluggable data memory (HistoROM DAT).
• Error messages (incl. total operated hours) are stored.

Electrical connection→  37

Potential equalization→  43Endress+Hauser

201

Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

terminals

Spring-loaded terminals: Suitable for strands and strands with ferrules.
Conductor cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 (24 to 12 AWG).

Cable entries• Cable gland: M20 × 1.5 with cable ⌀ 6 to 12 mm (0.24 to 0.47 in)• Thread for cable entry:• NPT ½"
• G ½"• M20

Cable specification→  33

16.6

Performance characteristics

Reference operating
conditions• Error limits following DIN EN 29104, in future ISO 20456• Water, typically: +15 to +45 °C (+59 to +113 °F); 0.5 to 7 bar (73 to 101 psi)
• Data as indicated in the calibration protocol• Accuracy based on accredited calibration rigs according to ISO 17025

Maximum measured error

Error limits under reference operating conditions
o.r. = of reading
Volume flow
• ±0.5 % o.r. ± 1 mm/s (0.04 in/s)• Optional: ±0.2 % o.r. ± 2 mm/s (0.08 in/s)
Fluctuations in the supply voltage do not have any effect within the specified range.

[%]
2.5
2.0

0.5 %

1.5

0.2 %

1.0
0.5
0
0

0

1

2

5

4

10

6

15

20

8

25

30

10 [m/s]v
32 [ft/s]
A0028974 34

Maximum measured error in % o.r.

Electrical conductivity
Max. measured error not specified.
Repeatabilityo.r. = of reading
Volume flow
Max. ±0.1 % o.r. ± 0.5 mm/s (0.02 in/s)
Electrical conductivity
Max. ±5 % o.r.

202

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Influence of ambient
temperature

Technical data

Current output
Temperature coefficientMax. 1 μA/°C

Pulse/frequency output
Temperature coefficient

16.7

No additional effect. Included in accuracy.

Installation

Chapter "Mounting requirements" →  21

16.8
Ambient temperature
range

Environment→  23Temperature tables
Observe the interdependencies between the permitted ambient and fluid
temperatures when operating the device in hazardous areas.
For detailed information on the temperature tables, see the separate document
entitled "Safety Instructions" (XA) for the device.

Storage temperature

The storage temperature corresponds to the operating temperature range of thetransmitter and the sensor →  23.
• Protect the measuring device against direct sunlight during storage in order to avoid
unacceptably high surface temperatures.
• Select a storage location where moisture cannot collect in the measuring device as
fungus or bacteria infestation can damage the liner.
• If protection caps or protective covers are mounted these should never be removed
before installing the measuring device.

Degree of protection

Measuring device• As standard: IP66/67, type 4X enclosure• When housing is open: IP20, type 1 enclosure• Display module: IP20, type 1 enclosure
External WLAN antenna
IP67

Vibration- and shockresistanceVibration sinusoidal, in accordance with IEC 60068-2-6• 2 to 8.4 Hz, 3.5 mm peak
• 8.4 to 2 000 Hz, 1 g peak
Vibration broad-band random, according to IEC 60068-2-64• 10 to 200 Hz, 0.003 g2/Hz• 200 to 2 000 Hz, 0.001 g2/Hz• Total: 1.54 g rms
Shock half-sine, according to IEC 60068-2-27
6 ms 30 g

Endress+Hauser

203

Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Rough handling shocks according to IEC 60068-2-31
Mechanical load

• Protect the transmitter housing against mechanical effects, such as shock or impact.
• Never use the transmitter housing as a ladder or climbing aid.

Electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC)

As per IEC/EN 61326 and NAMUR Recommendation 21 (NE 21)
Details are provided in the Declaration of Conformity.

16.9
Medium temperature range

Process• –20 to +150 °C (–4 to +302 °F) for PFA, DN 25 to 200 (1 to 8")• –20 to +180 °C (–4 to +356 °F) for PFA high-temperature, DN 25 to 200 (1 to 8")• –40 to +130 °C (–40 to +266 °F) for PTFE, DN 15 to 600 (½ to 24")
1

TA[°F] [°C]
140 60
100

2

3

4

40
20
0

0

-20

-40

-40
-40 -20 0-40

020 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 [°C]
TF
100
200
300 360 [°F]A0035803

 35
TA
TF
1
2
3
4

204

PFA

Ambient temperature range
Fluid temperature
Colored area: the ambient temperature range –10 to –20 °C (+14 to –4 °F) applies to stainless flanges only
Hatched area: harsh environment only for fluid temperature range –20 to +130 °C (–4 to +266 °F)–20 to +150 °C (–4 to +302 °F) for PFA, DN 25 to 200 (1 to 8")–20 to +180 °C (–4 to +356 °F) for PFA high-temperature, DN 25 to 200 (1 to 8")

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINETTechnical data

1TA[°F] [°C]
140 60
100

40
20
0

0

-20

-40

-40
-40 -20 0-40

020 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 [°C]
TF
100
200
300 360 [°F]A0029808

 36
TA
TF
1

Conductivity
Pressure-temperature
ratings
Pressure tightness

PTFE

Ambient temperature range
Fluid temperature
Colored area: the ambient temperature range of –10 to –40 °C (+14 to –40 °F) applies to stainless flanges
only≥ 5 μS/cm for liquids in general.
An overview of the pressure-temperature ratings for the process connections isprovided in the "Technical Information" document
Liner: PFA
Nominal diameter

Endress+Hauser

Limit values for absolute pressure in [mbar] ([psi]) for medium temperatures:

[mm]

[in]

+25 °C (+77 °F)+80 °C (+176 °F)+100 to +180 °C(+212 to +356 °F)

25

1

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

32

–

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

40

1½

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

50

2

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

65

–

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

80

3

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

100

4

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

125

–

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

150

6

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

200

8

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

205

Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Liner: PTFE

Flow limit

Nominal diameter

Limit values for absolute pressure in [mbar] ([psi]) for medium temperatures:

[mm]

[in]

+25 °C (+77 °F)+80 °C (+176 °F)+100 °C (+212 °F)+130 °C (+266 °F)

15

½

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

100 (1.45)

25

1

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

100 (1.45)

32

–

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

100 (1.45)

40

1½

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

100 (1.45)

50

2

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

100 (1.45)

65

–

0 (0)

–

40 (0.58)

130 (1.89)

80

3

0 (0)

–

40 (0.58)

130 (1.89)

100

4

0 (0)

–

135 (1.96)

170 (2.47)

125–

135 (1.96)–

240 (3.48)

385 (5.58)150

6135 (1.96)–

240 (3.48)

385 (5.58)200

8200 (2.90)–

290 (4.21)

410 (5.95)

250

10

330 (4.79)–

400 (5.80)

530 (7.69)

300

12

400 (5.80)–

500 (7.25)

630 (9.14)

350

14

470 (6.82)–

600 (8.70)

730 (10.6)

400

16

540 (7.83)–

670 (9.72)

800 (11.6)

450

18

500

20

600

24

No negative pressure permitted!

The diameter of the pipe and the flow rate determine the nominal diameter of the sensor.
The optimum velocity of flow is between 2 to 3 m/s (6.56 to 9.84 ft/s). Also match thevelocity of flow (v) to the physical properties of the fluid:• v < 2 m/s (6.56 ft/s): for abrasive fluids (e.g. potter's clay, lime milk, ore slurry)• v > 2 m/s (6.56 ft/s): for fluids producing buildup (e.g. wastewater sludge)
A necessary increase in the flow velocity can be achieved by reducing the sensor
nominal diameter.
For an overview of the full scale values for the measuring range, see the "Measuring
range" section

Pressure loss

• No pressure loss occurs if the sensor is installed in a pipe with the same nominal
diameter.
• Pressure losses for configurations incorporating adapters according to DIN EN 545→  25

System pressure→  24

Vibrations→  2416.10 Mechanical construction
Design, dimensions

206

For the dimensions and installation lengths of the device, see the "Technical
Information" document, "Mechanical construction" section.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

WeightTechnical data

All values (weight exclusive of packaging material) refer to devices with flanges of thestandard pressure rating.
The weight may be lower than indicated depending on the pressure rating and design.
Weight specifications including transmitter as per order code for "Housing", option A"Aluminum, coated".
Different values due to different transmitter versions:
Transmitter version for the hazardous area
(Order code for "Housing", option A "Aluminum, coated"; Ex d): +2 kg (+4.4 lbs)
Weight in SI units
EN (DIN), AS 1)

Nominal diameter

1)

ASME

JIS

[mm]

[in]

Pressure rating[kg]

Pressure rating[kg]

Pressure rating

[kg]

15

½

PN 40

7.2

Class 150

7.2

10K

4.5

25

1

PN 40

8.0

Class 150

8.0

10K

5.3

32

–

PN 40

8.7

Class 150

–

10K

5.3

40

1½

PN 40

10.1

Class 150

10.1

10K

6.3

50

2

PN 40

11.3

Class 150

11.3

10K

7.3

65

–

PN 16

12.7

Class 150

–

10K

9.1

80

3

PN 16

14.7

Class 150

14.7

10K

10.5

100

4

PN 16

16.7

Class 150

16.7

10K

12.7

125

–

PN 16

22.2

Class 150

–

10K

19

150

6

PN 16

26.2

Class 150

26.2

10K

22.5

200

8

PN 10

45.7

Class 150

45.7

10K

39.9

250

10

PN 10

65.7

Class 150

75.7

10K

67.4

300

12

PN 10

70.7

Class 150

111

10K

70.3

350

14

PN 10

105.7

Class 150

176

10K

79

400

16

PN 10

120.7

Class 150

206

10K

100

450

18

PN 10

161.7

Class 150

256

10K

128

500

20

PN 10

156.7

Class 150

286

10K

142

600

24

PN 10

208.7

Class 150

406

10K

188

For flanges to AS, only DN 25 and 50 are available.

Weight in US units
Nominal diameter

Endress+Hauser

ASME

[mm]

[in]

Pressure rating

[lbs]

15

½

Class 150

15.9

25

1

Class 150

17.6

40

1½

Class 150

22.3

50

2

Class 150

24.9

80

3

Class 150

32.4

100

4

Class 150

36.8

150

6

Class 150

57.7

200

8

Class 150

101

250

10

Class 150

167

207

Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Nominal diameter

Measuring tube
specification

Materials

ASME

[mm]

[in]

Pressure rating

[lbs]

300

12

Class 150

244

350

14

Class 150

387

400

16

Class 150

454

450

18

Class 150

564

500

20

Class 150

630

600

24

Class 150

895

NominaldiameterPressure rating
EN
(DIN)

ASME

Process connection internal diameter

AS 2129 AS 4087

JIS

PFA

PTFE

[mm]

[in]

[bar]

[psi]

[bar]

[bar]

[bar]

[mm]

[in]

[mm]

[in]

15

½

PN 40

Class 150

–

–

20K

–

–

15

0.59

25

1

PN 40

Class 150

Table E

–

20K

23

0.91

26

1.02

32

–

PN 40

–

–

–

20K

32

1.26

35

1.38

40

1½

PN 40

Class 150

–

–

20K

36

1.42

41

1.61

50

2

PN 40

Class 150

Table E

PN 16

10K

48

1.89

52

2.05

65

–

PN 16

–

–

–

10K

63

2.48

67

2.64

80

3

PN 16

Class 150

–

–

10K

75

2.95

80

3.15

100

4

PN 16

Class 150

–

–

10K

101

3.98

104

4.09

125

–

PN 16

–

–

–

10K

126

4.96

129

5.08

150

6

PN 16

Class 150

–

–

10K

154

6.06

156

6.14

200

8

PN 10

Class 150

–

–

10K

201

7.91

202

7.95

250

10

PN 10

Class 150

–

–

10K

–

–

256

10.1

300

12

PN 10

Class 150

–

–

10K

–

–

306

12.0

350

14

PN 10

Class 150

–

–

10K

–

–

337

13.3

400

16

PN 10

Class 150

–

–

10K

–

–

387

15.2

450

18

PN 10

Class 150

–

–

10K

–

–

432

17.0

500

20

PN 10

Class 150

–

–

10K

–

–

487

19.2

600

24

PN 10

Class 150

–

–

10K

–

–

593

23.3

Transmitter housing
Order code for "Housing":
Option A "Aluminum, coated": aluminum, AlSi10Mg, coated
Window material
Order code for "Housing":
Option A "Aluminum, coated": glass
Cable entries/cable glands

208

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINETTechnical data

Order code for "Housing", option A "Aluminum, coated"
The various cable entries are suitable for hazardous and non-hazardous areas.
Cable entry/cable gland
Coupling M20 × 1.5
Adapter for cable entry with internal thread G ½"

Material
Non-Ex: plastic
Z2, D2, Ex d/de: brass with plastic
Nickel-plated brass

Adapter for cable entry with internal thread NPT ½"

Sensor housing• DN 15 to 300 (½ to 12"): coated aluminum AlSi10Mg• DN 350 to 600 (14 to 24"): carbon steel with protective varnish
Measuring tubes
Stainless steel, 1.4301/304/1.4306/304L
For flanges made of carbon with Al/Zn protective coating (DN 15 to 300 (½ to 12")) or
protective varnish (DN 350 to 600 (14 to 24"))
Liner
• PFA
• PTFE
Process connections
EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501)
Stainless steel, 1.4571; carbon steel, E250C 1)/S235JRG2/P245GH
ASME B16.5
Stainless steel, F316L; carbon steel, A105 1)
JIS B2220
Stainless steel, F316L 1); carbon steel, A105/A350 LF2
AS 2129 Table E• DN 25 (1"): carbon steel, A105/S235JRG2• DN 40 (1 ½"): carbon steel, A105/S275JR
AS 4087 PN 16
Carbon steel, A105/S275JRElectrodes
Stainless steel, 1.4435 (F316L); Alloy C22, 2.4602 (UNS N06022); platinum; tantalum;
titaniumSeals
As per DIN EN 1514-1, form IBC
Accessories
Protective cover
Stainless steel, 1.4404 (316L)

1)

DN 15 to 300 (½ to 12") with Al/Zn protective varnish; DN 350 to 600 (14 to 24") with protective varnish

Endress+Hauser

209

Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

External WLAN antenna• Antenna: ASA plastic (acrylic ester-styrene-acrylonitrile) and nickel-plated brass• Adapter: Stainless steel and nickel-plated brass• Cable: Polyethylene• Plug: Nickel-plated brass• Angle bracket: Stainless steel
Ground disks
Stainless steel, 1.4435 (F316L); Alloy C22, 2.4602 (UNS N06022); tantalum; titanium
Fitted electrodes

Measuring electrodes, reference electrodes and electrodes for empty pipe detection:• Standard: stainless steel, 1.4435 (F316L); Alloy C22, 2.4602 (UNS N06022); tantalum,
titanium• Optional: only platinum measuring electrodes

Process connections• EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501)• ASME B16.5• JIS B2220• AS 2129 Table E• AS 4087 PN 16
For information on the different materials used in the process connections →  209

Surface roughness

Stainless steel electrodes, 1.4435 (F316L); Alloy C22, 2.4602 (UNS N06022); platinum;
tantalum; titanium:≤ 0.3 to 0.5 µm (11.8 to 19.7 µin)
(All data relate to parts in contact with fluid)
Liner with PFA:
≤ 0.4 µm (15.7 µin)
(All data relate to parts in contact with fluid)

16.11 Human interface
Languages

Can be operated in the following languages:• Via local operation
English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch, Portuguese, Polish, Russian, Turkish,
Chinese, Japanese, Korean, Bahasa (Indonesian), Vietnamese, Czech, Swedish• Via Web browser
English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch, Portuguese, Polish, Russian, Turkish,
Chinese, Japanese, Korean, Bahasa (Indonesian), Vietnamese, Czech, Swedish• Via "FieldCare", "DeviceCare" operating tool: English, German, French, Spanish, Italian,
Chinese, Japanese

Local operation

Via display module
Equipment:• Order code for "Display; operation", option F "4-line, illuminated, graphic display;
touch control"• Order code for "Display; operation", option G "4-line, illuminated, graphic display;
touch control + WLAN"
Information about WLAN interface →  73

210

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINETTechnical data

A0026785

 37

Operation with touch control

Display elements• 4-line, illuminated, graphic display• White background lighting; switches to red in event of device errors• Format for displaying measured variables and status variables can be individuallyconfigured• Permitted ambient temperature for the display: –20 to +60 °C (–4 to +140 °F)
The readability of the display may be impaired at temperatures outside the temperature
range.
Operating elements• External operation via touch control (3 optical keys) without opening the housing: ,, • Operating elements also accessible in the various zones of the hazardous area
Via remote display and operating module DKX001
The remote display and operating module DKX001 is available as an optional extra→  189.
• The measuring device is always supplied with a dummy cover when the remote
display and operating module DKX001 is ordered directly with the measuring
device. Display or operation at the transmitter is not possible in this case.
• If ordered subsequently, the remote display and operating module DKX001 may not
be connected at the same time as the existing measuring device display module.
Only one display or operation unit may be connected to the transmitter at any onetime.

A0026786 38

Operation via remote display and operating module DKX001

Display and operating elements
The display and operating elements correspond to those of the display module →  210.

Endress+Hauser

211

Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Material
The housing material of the display and operating module DKX001 depends on the choiceof transmitter housing material.
Transmitter housing

Remote display and operating module

Order code for "Housing"Material

Material

Option A "Aluminum, coated"

AlSi10Mg, coated

AlSi10Mg, coated

Cable entry
Corresponds to the choice of transmitter housing, order code for "Electrical connection".
Connecting cable→  34
Dimensions
Information on the dimensions:"Mechanical construction" section of the "Technical Information" document.
Remote operation→  72Service interface→  73

Supported operating tools

Different operating tools can be used for local or remote access to the measuring device.
Depending on the operating tool used, access is possible with different operating units andvia a variety of interfaces.
Supported operating
tools

Operating unit

Interface

Additional information

Web browser

Notebook, PC or tablet
with Web browser• CDI-RJ45 service
Special Documentation forinterfacedevice• WLAN interface• Ethernet-based
fieldbus (EtherNet/IP,
PROFINET)

DeviceCare SFE100

Notebook, PC or tablet• CDI-RJ45 service
with Microsoft Windowsinterfacesystem• WLAN interface• Fieldbus protocol→  190

FieldCare SFE500

Notebook, PC or tablet• CDI-RJ45 service
with Microsoft Windowsinterfacesystem• WLAN interface• Fieldbus protocol→  190

Other operating tools based on FDT technology with a device driver such as DTM/
iDTM or DD/EDD can be used for device operation. These operating tools are available
from the individual manufacturers. Integration into the following operating tools,
among others, is supported:• Field Device Manager (FDM) by Honeywell → www.honeywellprocess.com• FieldMate by Yokogawa → www.yokogawa.com• PACTWare → www.pactware.com
The associated device description files are available at: www.endress.com →Downloads

212

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINETTechnical data

Web serverThanks to the integrated Web server, the device can be operated and configured via a Web
browser and via a service interface (CDI-RJ45) or via a WLAN interface. The structure of
the operating menu is the same as for the local display. In addition to the measured values,
status information on the device is also displayed and allows the user to monitor the statusof the device. Furthermore the device data can be managed and the network parameters
can be configured.
A device that has a WLAN interface (can be ordered as an option) is required for the
WLAN connection: order code for "Display; operation", option G "4-line, illuminated; touch
control + WLAN". The device acts as an Access Point and enables communication bycomputer or a mobile handheld terminal.
Supported functions
Data exchange between the operating unit (such as a notebook for example) and themeasuring device:• Upload the configuration from the measuring device (XML format, configuration
backup)• Save the configuration to the measuring device (XML format, restore configuration)• Export event list (.csv file)• Export parameter settings (.csv file or PDF file, document the measuring point
configuration)• Export the Heartbeat verification log (PDF file, only available with the "Heartbeat
Verification" application package)• Flash firmware version for device firmware upgrade, for instance• Download driver for system integration• Visualize up to 1000 saved measured values (only available with the Extended
HistoROM application package →  216)
Web server special documentation →  218

HistoROM
data management

The measuring device features HistoROM data management. HistoROM data management
comprises both the storage and import/export of key device and process data, making
operation and servicing far more reliable, secure and efficient.
When the device is delivered, the factory settings of the configuration data are stored
as a backup in the device memory. This memory can be overwritten with an updated
data record, for example after commissioning.
Additional information on the data storage concept

There are different types of data storage units in which device data are stored and used by the device:
Available data

Device memory

T-DAT

S-DAT

• Event logbook such as diagnostic eventsfor example• Parameter data record backup• Device firmware package• Driver for system integration forexporting via Web server, e.g:
GSDML for PROFINET• Measured value logging ("Extended
HistoROM" order option)• Current parameter data record (usedby firmware at run time)• Peakhold indicator (min/max values)• Totalizer values• Sensor data: nominal diameter etc.
• Serial number• Calibration data
• Device configuration (e.g. SW options,
fixed I/O or multi I/O)

Attachable to the user interface board in
the connection compartment

In the sensor plug in the transmitter
neck part

Storage location Fixed on the user interface board in theconnection compartment

Endress+Hauser

213

Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Data backup
Automatic• The most important device data (sensor and transmitter) are automatically saved in the
DAT modules• If the transmitter or measuring device is replaced: once the T-DAT containing theprevious device data has been exchanged, the new measuring device is ready for
operation again immediately without any errors• If the sensor is replaced: once the sensor has been replaced, new sensor data aretransferred from the S-DAT in the measuring device and the measuring device is readyfor operation again immediately without any errors• If exchanging the electronics module (e.g. I/O electronics module): Once the electronics
module has been replaced, the software of the module is compared against the current
device firmware. The module software is upgraded or downgraded where necessary. The
electronics module is available for use immediately afterwards and no compatibility
problems occur.
ManualAdditional parameter data record (complete parameter settings) in the integrated device
memory HistoROM backup for:• Data backup function
Backup and subsequent restoration of a device configuration in the device memory
HistoROM backup• Data comparison function
Comparison of the current device configuration with the device configuration saved in
the device memory HistoROM backup
Data transfer
Manual• Transfer of a device configuration to another device using the export function of thespecific operating tool, e.g. with FieldCare, DeviceCare or Web server: to duplicate theconfiguration or to store in an archive (e.g. for backup purposes)• Transmission of the drivers for system integration via Web server, e.g.:
GSDML for PROFINET
Event list
Automatic• Chronological display of up to 20 event messages in the events list
• If the Extended HistoROM application package (order option) is enabled: up to 100
event messages are displayed in the events list along with a time stamp, plain text
description and remedial measures• The events list can be exported and displayed via a variety of interfaces and operating
tools e.g. DeviceCare, FieldCare or Web server
Data logging
ManualIf the Extended HistoROM application package (order option) is enabled:• Record up to 1 000 measured values via 1 to 4 channels• User configurable recording interval• Record up to 250 measured values via each of the 4 memory channels• Export the measured value log via a variety of interfaces and operating tools e.g.
FieldCare, DeviceCare or web server

16.12 Certificates and approvals
Currently available certificates and approvals can be called up via the productconfigurator.
214

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

CE mark

Technical data

The device meets the legal requirements of the applicable EU Directives. These are listed in
the corresponding EU Declaration of Conformity along with the standards applied.
Endress+Hauser confirms successful testing of the device by affixing to it the CE mark.

Ex approval

The devices are certified for use in hazardous areas and the relevant safety instructions areprovided in the separate "Safety Instructions" (XA) document. Reference is made to thisdocument on the nameplate.

Pharmaceuticalcompatibility• FDA• USP Class VI• TSE/BSE Certificate of Suitability

Certification PROFINETPROFINET interface
The measuring device is certified and registered by the PNO (PROFIBUS User
Organization). The measuring system meets all the requirements of the following
specifications:• Certified according to:• Test specification for PROFINET devices• PROFINET Security Level 2 – Netload Class• The device can also be operated with certified devices of other manufacturers(interoperability)• The device supports PROFINET S2 system redundancy.

Radio approval

The measuring device has radio approval.
For detailed information regarding radio approval, see Special Documentation

Pressure Equipment
Directive• With the identification PED/G1/x (x = category) on the sensor nameplate,Endress+Hauser confirms conformity with the "Essential Safety Requirements" specified
in Appendix I of the Pressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU.
• Devices not bearing this marking (PED) are designed and manufactured according togood engineering practice. They meet the requirements of Article 4 paragraph 3 of thePressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU. The range of application is indicated intables 6 to 9 in Annex II of the Pressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU.

Measuring instrument
approval

The measuring device is qualified to OIML R117 and has an OIML Certificate ofConformity (optional).

Additional certification

PWIS-free
PWIS = paint-wetting impairment substances
Order code for "Service":• Option HC: PWIS-free (version A)• Option HD: PWIS-free (version B)• Option HE: PWIS-free (version C)
For more information on PWIS-free certification, see "Test specification" document
TS01028D

Endress+Hauser

215

Technical data

Other standards andguidelines

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET• EN 60529
Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)• EN 61010-1
Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratoryuse - general requirements• IEC/EN 61326
Emission in accordance with Class A requirements. Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC
requirements).
• NAMUR NE 21
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) of industrial process and laboratory control
equipment• NAMUR NE 32
Data retention in the event of a power failure in field and control instruments withmicroprocessors• NAMUR NE 43
Standardization of the signal level for the breakdown information of digital transmitterswith analog output signal.
• NAMUR NE 53
Software of field devices and signal-processing devices with digital electronics• NAMUR NE 105
Specifications for integrating fieldbus devices in engineering tools for field devices• NAMUR NE 107
Self-monitoring and diagnosis of field devices• NAMUR NE 131
Requirements for field devices for standard applications• ETSI EN 300 328
Guidelines for 2.4 GHz radio components.
• EN 301489
Electromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum matters (ERM).

16.13 Application packages
Many different application packages are available to enhance the functionality of thedevice. Such packages might be needed to address safety aspects or specific application
requirements.
The application packages can be ordered with the device or subsequently fromEndress+Hauser. Detailed information on the order code in question is available from yourlocal Endress+Hauser sales center or on the product page of the Endress+Hauser website:www.endress.com.
Diagnostics functions

Package

Description

Extended HistoROM

Comprises extended functions concerning the event log and the activation of themeasured value memory.
Event log:
Memory volume is extended from 20 message entries (standard version) to up to
100 entries.
Data logging (line recorder):• Memory capacity for up to 1000 measured values is activated.
• 250 measured values can be output via each of the 4 memory channels. The
recording interval can be defined and configured by the user.
• Measured value logs can be accessed via the local display or operating tool e.g.
FieldCare, DeviceCare or Web server.

216

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINETHeartbeat Technology

Technical data

Package

Description

Heartbeat Verification+Monitoring

Heartbeat Verification
Meets the requirement for traceable verification to DIN ISO 9001:2008 Chapter
7.6 a) "Control of monitoring and measuring equipment".
• Functional testing in the installed state without interrupting the process.
• Traceable verification results on request, including a report.
• Simple testing process via local operation or other operating interfaces.
• Clear measuring point assessment (pass/fail) with high test coverage within theframework of manufacturer specifications.
• Extension of calibration intervals according to operator's risk assessment.
Heartbeat Monitoring
Continuously supplies data, which are characteristic of the measuring principle, toan external condition monitoring system for the purpose of preventive
maintenance or process analysis. These data enable the operator to:• Draw conclusions - using these data and other information - about the impact
process influences (such as corrosion, abrasion, buildup etc.) have on themeasuring performance over time.
• Schedule servicing in time.
• Monitor the process or product quality, e.g. gas pockets.

Cleaning

Package

Description

Electrode cleaning circuit(ECC)

The electrode cleaning circuit (ECC) function has been developed to have a solution
for applications where magnetite (Fe3O4) deposits frequently occur (e.g. hotwater). Since magnetite is highly conductive this build up leads to measuring errors
and ultimately to the loss of signal. The application package is designed to AVOID
build up of highly conductive matter and thin layers (typical of magnetite).

16.14 Accessories
Overview of accessories available for order →  189

16.15 Supplementary documentation
For an overview of the scope of the associated Technical Documentation, refer to thefollowing:• W@M Device Viewer (www.endress.com/deviceviewer): Enter the serial number
from nameplate• Endress+Hauser Operations App: Enter the serial number from the nameplate orscan the 2D matrix code (QR code) on the nameplate
Standard documentation

Brief Operating Instructions

Brief Operating Instructions for the sensor
Measuring device

Documentation code

Proline Promag P

KA01290D

Brief Operating Instructions for transmitter
Measuring device

Documentation code

Proline 300

KA01340D

Endress+Hauser

217

Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINETTechnical Information
Measuring device

Documentation code

Promag P 300

TI01224D

Description of device parameters
Measuring device

Documentation code

Promag 300

GP01112D

Device-dependent
additional documentation

Safety instructions
Safety instructions for electrical equipment for hazardous areas.

Contents

Documentation code

ATEX/IECEx Ex d/Ex de

XA01414D

ATEX/IECEx Ex ec

XA01514D

cCSAus XP

XA01515D

cCSAus Ex d/ Ex de

XA01516D

cCSAus Ex nA

XA01517D

INMETRO Ex d/Ex de

XA01518D

INMETRO Ex ec

XA01519D

NEPSI Ex d/Ex de

XA01520D

NEPSI Ex nA

XA01521D

EAC Ex d/Ex de

XA01656DEAC Ex nA

XA01657DJPN Ex d

XA01775D

Remote display and operating module DKX001
Contents

Documentation code

ATEX/IECEx Ex i

XA01494D

ATEX/IECEx Ex ec

XA01498D

cCSAus IS

XA01499D

cCSAus Ex nA

XA01513D

INMETRO Ex i

XA01500D

INMETRO Ex ec

XA01501D

NEPSI Ex i

XA01502D

NEPSI Ex nA

XA01503D

Special Documentation
Contents

Documentation code

Information on the Pressure Equipment Directive

SD01614D

Radio approvals for WLAN interface for A309/A310 display module

SD01793D

Remote display and operating module DKX001

SD01763D

218

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINETTechnical data

Contents

Documentation code

Heartbeat Technology

SD01986D

Web server

SD01977D

Installation Instructions
Content

Comment

Installation instructions for spare part sets and accessories• Access the overview of all the available spare part sets via
W@M Device Viewer →  187• Accessories available for order with Installation Instructions →  189

Endress+Hauser219

Index

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Index
A

About this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Access authorization to parameters
Read access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Write access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Incorrect input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Adapting the diagnostic behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Additional certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Ambient temperature
Influence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Ambient temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Applicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

C

Cable entries
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Cable entry
Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
CE mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 215
Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Certification PROFINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
cGMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Checklist
Post-connection check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Post-installation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Cleaning
Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Interior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Advanced settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Configuring the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Conductivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Connecting cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 34
Connecting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Connecting the signal cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Connecting the supply voltage cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Connection
see Electrical connection
Connection examples, potential equalization . . . . 43, 44
Connection preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Connection tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Context menu
Calling up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Current consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Cyclic data transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

D

Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Define access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130, 131
Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 203
220

Designated use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Device components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Device description files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Device documentation
Supplementary documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Device locking, status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Device master file
GSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Device nameSensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Device repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Device revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Device type ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
DeviceCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Device description file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Diagnostic behavior
Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Diagnostic information
Design, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149, 152
DeviceCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Light emitting diodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Local display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Remedial measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Diagnostic list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Diagnostic message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Diagnostics
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
DIP switches
see Write protection switch
Direct access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Direct access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Disabling write protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Displaysee Onsite display
Display and operating module DKX001 . . . . . . . . . . 211
Display area
For operational display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
In the navigation view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Display values
For locking status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Document
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Document function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Down pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

E

ECC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Editing view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Input screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Using operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 59
Electrical connection
Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Operating tools
Via PROFINET network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Via service interface (CDI-RJ45) . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Via WLAN interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
RSLogix 5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
WLAN interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Electromagnetic compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Electronics module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Enabling write protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Enabling/disabling the keypad lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Endress+Hauser services
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Environment
Ambient temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Mechanical load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Vibration- and shock-resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Error messages
see Diagnostic messages
Event list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Event logbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Ex approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Extended order code
Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

F

FDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Field of application
Residual risks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Device description file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Establishing a connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
User interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Filtering the event logbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
FirmwareRelease date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Firmware history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Fitted electrodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Flow direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Flow limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Function check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Functionssee ParameterG

Galvanic isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

H

Hardware write protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Endress+Hauser

Index

Heavy sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Help text
Calling up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
HistoROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

I

Identifying the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Incoming acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Influence
Ambient temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Inlet runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Inspection
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Received goods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Inspection check
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Installation conditions
Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Down pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Heavy sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Inlet and outlet runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Installation dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Mounting location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Partially filled pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
System pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Thermal insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Vibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Installation dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Interior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

L

Languages, operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Line recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Local display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Navigation view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
see Diagnostic message
see In alarm condition
see Operational display
Low flow cut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

M

Main electronics module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Maintenance tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Replacing seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Managing the device configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Manufacturer ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Manufacturing date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 17
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Maximum measured error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Measured values
Calculated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Measured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
see Process variables
Measuring and test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
221Index

Measuring device
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Integrating via communication protocol . . . . . . . . 78
Mounting the sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Mounting the ground cable/ground disks . . . . . 27
Mounting the seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Screw tightening torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Screw tightening torques, maximum . . . . . . . . 27
Screw tightening torques, nominal . . . . . . . . . . 30
Preparing for electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Preparing for mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Switch-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Measuring instrument approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Measuring principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Measuring range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Measuring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Measuring tube specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Mechanical load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Medium temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Menu
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90, 91
Menus
For measuring device configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
For specific settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Mounting dimensions
see Installation dimensions
Mounting location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Mounting preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Mounting tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

N

NameplateSensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Navigation path (navigation view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Navigation view
In the submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
In the wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Numeric editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

O

Onsite display
Numeric editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Text editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Operable flow range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 149
Operating keys
see Operating elements
Operating menu
Menus, submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Submenus and user roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Operating philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
222

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Operational display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Operational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Order code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 17
Orientation (vertical, horizontal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Outlet runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

P

Packaging disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Parameter
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Entering values or text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Parameter settings
Administration (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Advanced setup (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Communication (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Configuration backup (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Current input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Current input (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Current input 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Current output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Current output (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Data logging (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Define access code (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Device information (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Diagnostics (Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Display (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Display (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Electrode cleaning circuit (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . 121
Empty pipe detection (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
I/O configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
I/O configuration (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Low flow cut off (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Process variables (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Pulse/frequency/switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Pulse/frequency/switch output (Wizard) 100,
101,
104
Pulse/frequency/switch output 1 to n (Submenu) 137
Relay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Relay output 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Relay output 1 to n (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Reset access code (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Select medium (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Sensor adjustment (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Setup (Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Simulation (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Status input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Status input (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Status input 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
System units (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Totalizer 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115, 134
Totalizer handling (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Value current output 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . 137
Web server (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
WLAN settings (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Partially filled pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Performance characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Pharmaceutical compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Post-connection check (checklist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Post-installation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Post-installation check (checklist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Potential equalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Power supply failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Pressure Equipment Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Pressure tightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Pressure-temperature ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Process conditions
Conductivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Flow limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Fluid temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Pressure tightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Process connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Product safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Protecting parameter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

RRadio approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Read access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Reading measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Recalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Reference operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Registered trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Remedial measures
Calling up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Remote operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Repair of a device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Repairs
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Repeatability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Replacement
Device components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Replacing seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Requirements for personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

S

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Screw tightening torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Maximum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Nominal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
SensorMounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 17
Setting the operating language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Settings
Adapting the measuring device to the process
conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Advanced display configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Communication interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Endress+Hauser

Index

Current input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Current output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Device reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Device tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Electrode cleaning circuit (ECC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Empty pipe detection (EPD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
I/O configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Local display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Low flow cut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Managing the device configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Medium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Operating language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Pulse output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Pulse/frequency/switch output . . . . . . . . . . 100, 101
Relay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Resetting the totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Sensor adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Status input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
System units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Totalizer reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Showing data logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Signal on alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Software release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Spare part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Special connection instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Standards and guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Status area
For operational display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
In the navigation view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Status signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148, 151
Storage concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Storage conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Storage temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Structure
Measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Operating menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Submenu
Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125, 127
Advanced setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114, 115
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Configuration backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Current input 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Data logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Device information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Electrode cleaning circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Event list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
I/O configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Input values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Output values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Process variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
223

Index

Pulse/frequency/switch output 1 to n . . . . . . . . . 137
Relay output 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Reset access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Sensor adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Status input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Status input 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
System units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Totalizer 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115, 134
Totalizer handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Value current output 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Supplementary documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Surface roughness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Symbols
Controlling data entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
For communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
For diagnostic behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
For locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
For measured variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
For measurement channel number . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
For menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
For parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
For status signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
For submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
For wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
In the status area of the local display . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Input screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
System design
Measuring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
see Measuring device design
System integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
System pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
System redundancy S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

T

Technical data, overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Temperature range
Ambient temperature range for display . . . . . . . . 210
Storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Text editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Thermal insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Tool tipsee Help text
Tools
Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
For mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Totalizer
Assign process variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Transmitter
Turning the display module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Turning the housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
224

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET

Transporting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Troubleshooting
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
TSE/BSE Certificate of Suitability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Turning the display module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Turning the electronics housing
see Turning the transmitter housing
Turning the transmitter housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

U

Use of the measuring device
Borderline cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Incorrect use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
see Designated use
User interface
Current diagnostic event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Previous diagnostic event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
User roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
USP Class VI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

V

Version data for the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Vibration- and shock-resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Vibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

W

W@M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186, 187
W@M Device Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 187
WeightTransport (notes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
WizardCurrent input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Current output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Define access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Empty pipe detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Low flow cut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Pulse/frequency/switch output . . . . . . 100, 101, 104
Relay output 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Select medium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
WLAN settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
WLAN settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Workplace safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Write access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Write protection
Via access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Via write protection switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Write protection switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Endress+Hauser

www.addresses.endress.com